diff options
Diffstat (limited to '25337.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 25337.txt | 8402 |
1 files changed, 8402 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/25337.txt b/25337.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4c5473 --- /dev/null +++ b/25337.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8402 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible Powers, by +Bhakta Vishita + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible Powers + +Author: Bhakta Vishita + +Release Date: May 5, 2008 [EBook #25337] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GENUINE MEDIUMSHIP *** + + + + +Produced by Suzanne Lybarger, Brian Janes and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + +------------------------------------------------------------+ + | Transcriber's Note: | + | | + | Obvious typographical errors have been corrected in | + | this text. For a complete list, please see the bottom of | + | this document. | + +------------------------------------------------------------+ + + + + +Genuine Mediumship + +OR + +The Invisible Powers + +By +SWAMI BHAKTA VISHITA +(Hindoo Master) + +Author of Seership, the Science of Knowing the +Future + +ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO. +812 W. Van Buren St., Chicago, Ill. + +English Representatives +L. N. FOWLER & CO., 7 Imperial Arcade, +Ludgate Circus, London, England + +Copyright, 1919 By ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO. Chicago, Ill. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +PART I. + +NATURE'S FINER FORCES + +Knowledge versus Faith. Supernormal, not Supernatural. +Supernormal, not Abnormal. The Prevailing Ignorance. Prejudice +Against the Unusual. Great Changes Impending. The Naturalness of +Occult Powers. The World of Vibrations. Super-sensible +Vibrations. Unseen Worlds. Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds. +Manifold Planes of Existence. Planes and Vibrations. The Higher +Senses of Man. The World of Sensation. A Senseless World. The +Elemental Sense. The Raw Material of Thought. The Evolution of +the Senses. Unfoldment of New Senses. Discovery of New Worlds. We +Sense Only Vibratory Motion. The Higher Planes of Nature. An +Appeal to Reason 7 + +PART II. + +MENTAL VIBRATIONS AND TRANSMISSION + +The Higher Forces. Chitta, or Mind Substance. What Modern Science +Says. A Living Dynamic Focus. Dynamic Correlate of Thought. +Answer to Skeptical Critics. The World of Vibrations. Unchartered +Seas of Vibration. The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument. A +Great Scientist's Theory. Human-Electro-Magnetism. Human +Etherical Force. The Brain-Battery. A Peculiar Organ. The Pineal +Gland. Transmission of Thought. A General Principle. +Transformation of Vibrations. Example of Electric Light. Example +of Wireless Telegraphy. Example of Light Waves. Transformation of +Mental Vibrations. Vibrational Attunement. In Tune with the +Higher Planes. Two Key-Words 31 + +PART III. + +THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE + +Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. Thought Waves. +Vibratory Thought Force. Mental Atmospheres. The Categories of +Thought. Mental Whirlpools. Mental Tidal Waves. Immunity to +Thought Influences. Mental Attunement. Voluntary Transmission of +Mental Vibrations. Voluntary Mental Influence. White Magic. Black +Magic. Base Use of Mind Power. The Secret of Witchcraft. Modern +Black Magic. The Explanation of Sorcery. The Power of +Fearthought. The Negative Pole. Voodooism Explained. +Self-Protection. Repelling Adverse Influences. Telepathic +Phenomena. Scientific Investigators. How Experiments are +Conducted. Private Experiments. Development of Telepathic Power. +"Mind Reading." Development Practices. The "Willing Game." Formal +Tests. Automatic Writing. Psychic Sensitiveness 53 + +PART IV. + +CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA + +Clairvoyance Defined. The Phenomena of Clairvoyance. +Classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena. Psychometry. The +"Psychic Scent." Magnetic Affinity. Distant En Rapport. Psychic +Underground Explorations. Psychic Detective Work. How to +Psychometrize. Developing Psychometry. Varieties of Psychometry. +Psychometric "Getting in Touch." Psychometric Readings. Crystal +Gazing, etc. Crystals and Bright Objects. The Care of the +Crystal. How To Use the Crystal. The "Milky Mist." Classes of +Psychic Pictures. General Directions for Crystal Gazing. +Selection of Place, etc. Adjusting the Crystal. Time of Sitting. +Other Persons Present. Crystalline Vision. Physical Requirements. +Determining Time of Fulfillment. Two Classes of Visions. Time and +Space in Crystal Gazing. Direct Clairvoyance. Trance Conditions. +Clairvoyant Reverie. The Dawn of Clairvoyance. Methods of +Development 79 + +PART V. + +CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE + +Present Clairvoyance. The Human Aura. The Prana Aura. The Auric +Colors. Thought Forms. The X-Ray Sense. Microscopic Vision. Space +Clairvoyance. The Psychic Telescope. Radio-Activity. Sensing the +Higher Vibrations. Viewing Distant Scenes. Time Clairvoyance. +Past Time Clairvoyance. The Mystery Seeing the Past. Analogies of +the Physical Plane. Thousand Year Old Light. Reading the Light +Waves. The Akashic Plane. The Akashic Records. Degrees of +Clairvoyant Vision. "The Memory of Nature." Involuntary +Clairvoyance. Future Time Clairvoyance. Seeing What Has Not Yet +Happened. Simple Prevision. The Nature of Time. The Oriental +Teaching. The Eternal Now. Absolute Time 105 + +PART VI. + +MEDIUMSHIP + +What is Mediumship? Ancient Mediumship. Mediumship and Religious +Belief. The Ideals of Modern Spiritualism. Immortality +Demonstrated Through Mediumship. The Truth of Personal Survival. +The Gateway of Mediumship. The Mediumistic Character. +Mediumistic Sensitivity. The Higher Vibratory Forces. Psychic +Attunement. The Development of Mediumship. Unconscious +Mediumship. Mediumship and Individuality. Co-operation of Medium +and Spirits. Mediumship Not Dangerous. Rational Mediumship. The +"Home Circle." The Cure For Fraudulent Mediumship. Warning to +Young Mediums 133 + +PART VII. + +MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS + +Physical Phenomena. "Psychic Force." Human Magnetism. "Zoether." +"Prana." Mental Phenomena. The Value of Phenomena. Trance +Condition Not Essential. Scientific Reports on Phenomena. +Phenomena Without Darkness. Test Conditions. Is Darkness +Necessary? Developing Circles. Impersonating Mediumship. The +Proper Mental Condition. Proof of Spirit Identity. The "Trance +Condition." Spirit Impersonation. Spirit Suggestion. Psychic +Attunement. Automatic Writing. Inspirational Speaking. Gradual +Development of Powers. Spirit Guides. No Loss of Individuality. +Mediumship Beneficial. Mediumship and the Bible 153 + +PART VIII. + +HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP + +Who are Mediumistic? The Mediumistic Temperament. Is Mediumship +Desirable? Developing the Natural Power. Mediumship and Genius. +Spontaneous Mediumship. Mediumistic Flashes. Systematic +Development. The Development Circle. The Aspirational Attitude. +Natural Unfoldment. Persistent Watchful Waiting. Building Lines +of Communication. Developing Concentration. The Call for +Illumination. The Jacob's Ladder of Communion. What a Development +Circle Is. Forming the Development Circle. The Sitters in the +Circle. The Spirit Communication Code. The Matter of Time +Conditions. Opening the Seance. Developing a Medium. The +Personnel of the Circle. Changing the Sitters. Adding a Medium. +Reasons for Changes. Psychic Attunement. Pre-Test Manifestations. +Premature Tests. Forcing Tests. Spirit Directions. Questioning +the Spirits. Substance and Shadow 173 + +PART IX. + +MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA + +The Part Played by the Sitters. Result of Bad Sitters. Mental +Atmosphere of the Medium. The Mediumistic Mind. Mediumistic +"Stage Fright." The Psychic Telephone System. Interrupted +Communications. Some Difficulties of the Spirits. Difficulties +Overcome. The Psychic Triangle. Harmonious Relationship. The +Discord Note. Antagonistic Elements. The Open Mind. Spirits and +the Sense of Humor. Rhythmic Harmony. Retarding Factors. +Reasonable Demands of Spirits. Harmonious Conditions. The Channel +of Communication. The Role of the Spirits. Difficulties Among +Spirits. Disturbing elements. Impersonation Mediumship. True +Purpose of Mediumship. Gradual Development. Public Seances. Home +Circle Development. Undue Prolongation of Seances. Good Advice to +Young Mediums. Self-Protection for Mediums 200 + +PART X. + +EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE + +Signs of Spirit Presence. Spirit Rappings. Table Tippings. The +Spirit Signals. Flashes of Communication. Spirit Code-Signals. +Ouija Boards. A Homemade Ouija Board. Trance or Inspirational +Mediumship. Symptoms of Trance Conditions. The Entranced Stage. +Trance Phenomena. Entering the Trance. Advice to Trance Mediums. +Speaking Mediumship. Public-Speaking Under Control. Spirit Advice +and Counsel. Impersonating Manifestations. Incidents of +Impersonation. Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship. Value of +Identification. Fraudulent Claims of Identity. Guarding Against +Fraudulent Spirits. Spirit Jokers. A Typical Case of +Identification. Recalling Past Incidents. Identifying Property. +Identifying Historical Personages 229 + +PART XI. + +HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS + +Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance. Spirit Psychic Assistance. +Writing Mediumship. Incidents of Writing Mediumship. Developing +Writing Mediumship. Stead's Method and Results. Automatic Writing +vs. Inspirational Writing. Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing. +Advice to Writing Mediums. Drawing Mediumship. The Planchette. +How to Use the Planchette. Healing Mediumship. How To Heal by +Spirit Power. Materialization Mediumship. The Spirit Cabinet Is +Necessary. How To Make the Spirit Cabinet. How To Use the Spirit +Cabinet. Spirit Phosphorescence. Appearance of Materialized +Substance. Materialized Spirit Forms. Scientific Proof of +Materialization. How To Conduct a Materializing Seance. Trumpet +Mediumship. Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments. Independent +Slate Writing. The Slate Writing Circle. Spirit Paintings. +Practical Advice to Developing Mediums 251 + + + + +PART I + +NATURE'S FINER FORCES + + +One of the most common mistaken conceptions of the average student of +the occult sciences, and of so-called "psychic phenomena" in general, is +that which may be expressed by the term "supernatural." This term, as +you know, is used to express the idea of "that which is outside of the +realm of Nature, and of Nature's laws." + + +Knowledge Versus Faith + +As a matter of fact, as all the advanced students and teachers of the +occult doctrine know full well, we have no direct knowledge whatsoever +of anything that is "outside of the realm of nature, and of Nature's +laws." It is true that we may, by an act of faith, profess to believe in +powers and beings entirely apart from the great realm of Nature--in +fact, most persons do believe in such powers and beings in connection +with their formal religion--but their belief is entirely within the +category of Faith, and is not even pretended to be based upon actual +experience and phenomenal manifestation. + +The moment that there appears any manifestation which is possible of +being known to, or experienced by, the human senses, ordinary or +extraordinary, that moment the phenomena and the immediate cause thereof +must be regarded as being properly classed in the category of "natural." +This is true not only of such phenomena as are perceived by means of our +ordinary five senses, but also of those which are perceptible only to +the highest powers of perception, or higher senses, which are latent in +all human beings but which are unfolded only in the case of a +comparatively few individuals of the race. + +It should be clearly understood by all students of occultism or psychic +phenomena that man's knowledge and experience, normal or supernormal, is +confined to the realm of Nature. There is a "ring pass-not" around the +boundaries of the Kingdom of Nature which mortals cannot pass, no matter +how high may be their degree of development and advancement. Even those +great mystics whose writings are filled with the startling revelations +of "union with the Divine," and of "At-one-ment with Deity," are under +no illusion concerning this fact they know full well that only in so far +as Deity involves itself in Nature--wraps itself up in the garments of +Nature--can it be directly experienced by man, and thus actually known +by him. + + +Supernormal, Not Supernatural + +Perhaps a clearer understanding of this important subject will be had if +we but substitute the term "supernormal" for that of "supernatural." The +term "supernormal" is not commonly employed, and but few know that such +a word is to be found in the dictionaries, much less know its meaning; +but a study of its meaning, and its adoption in our thinking, will serve +to give us a clearer conception of the true nature of many strange +phases of experience of which we have become conscious, either by +reasons of their manifestation by ourselves, or else by the +manifestation on the part of others. It will accordingly be well for us +to carefully examine this term and its meaning. + +"Subnormal" means: "Beyond, above, or exceeding that which is NORMAL; +extraordinary, inexplicable perhaps, but NOT supernatural." Now, the +term "normal" means: "Conforming to a certain standard, rule, or type"; +hence, anything that is "supernormal" is something that is ABOVE THE +USUAL PATTERN, RULE, OR TYPE. + +There is an important distinction to be noted here, to-wit: a thing may +be OUTSIDE of the usual pattern, rule, or type, in the sense of being +INFERIOR TO or UNDER the ordinary standard, and in this case is known as +"ABNORMAL," the latter term being employed as a term of depreciation. On +the other hand, the "OUTSIDE of the standard" quality may consist of a +SUPERIORITY to the prevailing standard, and accordingly is entitled to +be classed in the category of the "SUPERnormal"--the prefix "SUPER" +meaning "ABOVE, OVER, HIGHER, etc." + +It is important that the distinction be made clearly between the use and +meaning of these two terms, "abnormal" and "supernormal," respectively. +The first named denotes INFERIORITY, and the latter denotes SUPERIORITY. +This distinction may be more clearly apprehended by means of a concrete +example, as follows: + +On our own plane of existence the senses of sight and hearing, +respectively, are included in the usual standard, pattern, and type of +sense normality--every normal person possesses these senses in a certain +general degree of power; hence, on this plane of existence, a person +born blind, or deaf, is spoken of as "ABNORMAL," that is to say, such a +person is DEFICIENT in regard to the sense powers. + +On the contrary, let us imagine a plane of existence, in which the +great majority of individuals lack the power of sight and hearing, +respectively. On such a plane of existence, the occasional individual +who was born possessed of the powers of sight and hearing, respectively, +would be properly regarded as "SUPERNORMAL," that is to say, such a +person would be SUPERIOR to the ordinary run of individuals--above them, +in fact. The term "ABNORMAL" means MINUS the ordinary standard quality; +and the term "SUPERNORMAL" means PLUS the ordinary standard quality. And +yet both the "plus" and the "minus" would be "outside" the normal type, +though there is a difference as wide as that between the two poles, in +this "outsideness." + + +Supernormal, Not Abnormal + +The above important statement concerning the distinction between the +"abnormal" and "supernormal" is not made merely for the purpose of +academic differentiation and classification. On the other hand, it is +made because there is a most pernicious tendency on the part of the +ignorant and unthinking portions of the public to regard and to classify +certain high phases of occult and psychic manifestation of power as +"abnormal," hence BELOW the standard; whereas, properly speaking, such +manifestations of power are far ABOVE THE STANDARD, and, hence, clearly +entitled to the term "supernormal." + + +The Prevailing Ignorance + +The ignorant and unthinking attitude of certain portions of the general +public toward this class of phenomena is akin to that of a community of +blind and deaf persons, satisfied that their own "three sense" standard +is the highest possible one attainable by living creatures and that all +variation therefrom must be considered as "abnormal." In such a +community there would occasionally be born certain individuals possessed +of the senses of sight and hearing, in addition to the common three +senses possessed by the entire community. Judging by what we know of the +tendency of human nature in such cases, we are warranted in conjuring +that the ordinary run of persons in such a community would revile the +seeing and hearing individuals as "abnormal," and their possessors +therefore to be pitied, and perhaps shunned. Only the intelligent and +thoughtful members of such a community would be able to grasp the fact +that these exceptional individuals were really not only not "abnormal," +and inferior to type, but that they were really "supernormal," and +superior to type. + + +Prejudice Against the Unusual. + +Those to whom the above illustration may seem far-fetched, exaggerated, +and unwarranted, are asked to carefully consider the ignorant and +unthinking attitude which the great majority of the general public, at +least at first, present toward that most wonderful display of +supernormal powers, known as "occult" or "psychic," made by the few +highly developed individuals of the race who are able to manifest them +to some degree. These individuals are regarded as "queer," and +"strange," "unnatural," and "abnormal" by their ignorant and unthinking +neighbors and associates, just as the seeing and hearing exceptional +individuals were likewise so regarded by their blind and deaf neighbors +in the above illustration. And, here as in the illustration it is only +the few intelligent and thinking individuals of the community who +recognize that the departure from the standard type is in the direction +of advancement and gain, rather than of retrogression and loss--a plus +attribute, rather than a minus one. The illustration is startlingly true +and in accordance with the facts of the case, as many thoughtful persons +know only to well, and admit sadly. + + +Great Changes Impending + +But it would be unjust and unfair to the general public were we to fail +to add to the above criticism the fact that there is underway a great +change in the public opinion regarding this important matter. More and +more persons are becoming interested in Nature's Finer Forces every day; +more are becoming more familiar with the phenomena manifested by the +gifted individuals possessing these wondrous powers; and more are coming +to realize that these powers are really latent in all of the members of +the human race, though lying dormant in the majority thereof, and may be +unfolded and brought into active manifestation by scientific methods of +training and development. But, even so, the student and teacher of this +great subject should carefully bear in mind the important distinction +above made between that which is "abnormal," and that which is +"supernormal"; and such should lose no opportunity in pointing out this +important distinction whenever the subject arises in conversation or +argument--for the propaganda of truth should be earnestly and vigorously +pursued, in order that the world may be liberated from its chains of +error. + + +The Naturalness of the Occult Powers + +Returning to the subject considered in the opening paragraphs of this +book, namely, the NATURALNESS of the occult and psychic higher powers +and the manifestation thereof, we strongly advise all students of these +subjects to acquire a working knowledge of the place in Nature occupied +by these powers and their manifestations. A little scientific +information on this subject will render the student better able to +intelligently teach others concerning these matters, and also to +successfully defend himself when the ignorant and unthinking seek to +attack the things which are so dear to his heart, and so real and +evident to himself. Many, by reason of their lack of scientific +knowledge on these points, not only fail to make converts to their cause +of truth, but often really drive away persons who might otherwise be +interested. Many persons are really interested in and attracted to the +manifestations of the higher occult and psychic powers, but are fearful +of anything "unnatural" or "supernatural," and are disposed to be +frightened off by any suspicion of such qualities in things. These same +persons, if shown that the phenomena have a perfectly valid scientific +base in natural forces and laws, will throw aside their fears and will +become earnest investigators and students of this great subject. Hence, +as we have said, every teacher and student of this subject should know +the true scientific natural basis thereof; and in the following few +pages we shall endeavor to plainly, though briefly, present these to +you. + + +The World of Vibrations + +Modern science furnishes abundant testimony to support and substantiate +the teachings of the ancient Hindu sages to the effect that everything +in the Universe is in constant motion, which is manifested by varying +rates, degrees, and modes of vibration. The modern scientists, alike +with the ancient occultist, knows that the differences between the +things of the Universe arise mainly from the different rates, modes, and +degrees of the vibrations manifested in the things themselves. If we +change the vibration of a thing, we practically change the manifested +nature of that thing. The difference between solid ice, liquid water, +semi-gaseous vapor, and gaseous steam is simply the difference caused by +various rates of vibration caused by heat. The difference between red +and blue, green and violet, is simply that caused by varying rates of +vibration. Light and heat, as well as sound, depend for the differences +upon rates of vibration. + + +Super-Sensible Vibrations. + +Moreover, as every text book on science informs us, there are sounds too +low as well as those too high for the human ear to register, but which +are registered by delicate instruments. Again, there are colors beyond +the place of red, at one end of the visible spectrum; and others beyond +the place of violet at the other end of that spectrum, which the human +eye is unable to register and detect, but which our apparatus in the +laboratory plainly register. The ray of light which registers on the +photographic plate, and which causes sunburn on our skin, is too high a +rate of vibration for our eyes to perceive. Likewise the X-Rays, and +many other of the finer rays of light known to science are imperceptible +to the unaided human vision--they are actually "dark rays" so far as the +human eye is concerned, though man has devised instruments by means of +which they may be caught and registered. + + +The Higher Vibrations + +The vibrations of magnetism and electricity are imperceptible to our +sight, though they may be registered by the appropriate apparatus; and +if we had the proper sense of apparatus to perceive them, these rays of +vibratory force would open up a whole new world to us. Likewise, if we +could increase our power of hearing-perception, we would seem to be +living in a new world of sights and sounds now closed to us. Reasoning +along the same lines of thought, many great thinkers have held that +there is no reason for doubting the possible existence of other +world-planes of being, just as real and as actual as the one upon which +we live, and move, and have our being, but which is forever invisible to +the ordinary human sight and senses; the apparent nothingness of such +worlds arising solely from the great difference in the rates of +vibrations between the two planes of being. + + +Unseen Worlds. + +Listen to what careful thinkers have said concerning the possibility of +entire worlds existing in the same space occupied by us, but of which we +are unconscious by reason of our failure to sense their vibrations: One +says, "All our sensations are due to the impact upon our sense-organs of +vibrations in some form. Variations in the strength and rapidity of +these vibrations constitute the difference in our perceptions. Our range +of response is but a limited one. Some vibrations are too rapid and some +too slow to affect our senses, and therefore we have called to our aid +various mechanical contrivances which enable us to recognize existences +which would otherwise remain unknown. But it is still conceivable that +there may be, and doubtless are, conditions of vibratory energy that +escape us, and which, if we could develop finer senses, would yield +wonderful results and extensions of our power and knowledge. Today, +indeed, we are coming into contact with forces, possibilities, and +personalities which amount to a revelation of a new universe of things." + + +Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds. + +Another says: "It is true that 'things are not what they seem'; but +everything seems to be 'thus and so' to us only because of its +particular plane of being, and that plane of being is determined by its +vibrations. On one plane there is a certain vibratory value or speed; +on another plane, a different one; but a plane is not a place, but a +state, and so it is possible that two utterly different planes of being +might co-exist in the same place and be entirely unknown to one another. +That may seem absurd, but it is a scientific truth, and many authorities +have endorsed the same." + +Another says: "There may be, right here and now, passing through us and +this world, some planet invisible to us, with mountains, oceans, lakes, +rivers, cities, and inhabitants: and yet we know absolutely nothing of +their existence." Another says: "Some students of the occult find it +difficult to grasp the idea of a number of manifestations, each having +its own rate of vibration, occupying the same point of space at the same +time. A slight consideration of the phenomena of the physical world +would perhaps aid such persons in assimilating the concept in question. +For instance, as every student of physics knows, a single point of space +may contain at the same time vibrations of heat, light of many shades, +magnetism electricity, X-Rays, etc., each manifesting its own rate of +vibration, land yet none interfering with the others." + +Another says: "Every beam of sunlight contains many different colors, +each with its own degree of vibration, and yet none crowding out the +others. By the use of the proper forms of laboratory apparatus each kind +of light may be separated from the others, and the ray thus split up. +The difference in colors arises simply from the different rates of +etheric vibrations. Again, it is possible to send many telegrams along +the same wire, at the same time, by using senders and receivers of +different vibratory keynotes. The same thing has its corresponding +analogy in the case of the wireless telegraphy. So you see, even on the +physical planes we find many forms of vibratory energy manifesting on, +in, and at the same point of space at the same time, without interfering +one with the other." + + +Manifold Planes of Existence + +The ancient occult teachings have ever insisted upon the presence of +numerous planes of existence, of which our own particular plane is but +one. And all of these numerous planes are equally within the realms of +Nature; none of them being supernatural. And there is always found to +exist a correspondence between these several planes of manifestation; +and, under supernormal conditions, a certain degree of possible +communication between them. Each of these planes has numerous +subdivisions and subplanes, the divisions being according to the rule of +"sevens," as follows: there are seven grand planes, and each of these +are subdivided into seven secondary planes, and each of these into seven +tertiary planes, and so on until the division has been made seven times. + +The student of occultism, particularly at the beginning of his studies, +experiences difficulty in comprehending just what is meant by the term +"plane" as employed in the occult teachings. His first impression, +usually encouraged by the use of the dictionary, is that each "plane" is +one of a series of strata or layers, above and below which are present +other layers or strata. Even after the student progresses in his +understanding of the subject, this original picture of material layers +and strata tends to persist in his thought on the subject. The error, of +course, arises from his original conception of the planes, layers, or +strata as being composed of gross material matter, whereas, as a matter +of fact, only one of the many planes is so composed. When one stops to +think that even the grossest form of matter is itself composed of +vibrations of energy (for science teaches that all matter is but energy +at the last); and that all other forms of material substance is likewise +so composed of vibrations of energy; then one is on the road to the +discovery of the real state of affairs. Then he begins to realize that +instead of the planes of being rising one above the other in the scale +of their fineness, they are graded according to their degree of +vibratory energy, and each may actually occupy the same space as all the +others. In short, the "planes" are not strata or layers of "matter" at +all, but are simply different states of vibration of energy; and that +which we know as "matter" is simply one (and a very low one) of the many +forms of such vibrations. + +From the above, it is seen that the various planes of being are not +distinguished by spatial position; they do not lie one superimposed on +the other, like layers or strata of matter. Instead, they interpenetrate +each other in the same limits of space. A single point of space may +accommodate the manifestations of each and all of the seven great planes +of being, and all the subdivisions, and sub-divisions (sevenfold in +division) at the same time. The old occultists impressed this and other +facts upon the minds of their pupils by the oft-repeated aphorism: "A +PLANE OF BEING IS NOT A PLACE OF BEING, BUT A STATE OF BEING." And the +"state of being" is simply a certain manifestation of vibratory energy. +With these ideas firmly fixed in the mind, the student is less apt to +wander astray from the facts of the case. + + +Planes and Vibrations + +To those who may be disposed to regard the above statements concerning +the "planes of being" as somewhat visionary, theoretical, or imaginary, +we would say: "Go to modern science, and verify this statement." The +following quotation from a writer on the subject will serve to +illustrate this fact, viz.: "We are apt to think that we are familiar +with every kind of matter in existence, but such is not the case. We are +familiar with only a few forms of matter. Spectrum analysis shows us +that on certain fixed stars there are forms of matter far different from +matter as we know it on this planet. On some stars this unknown matter +appears to be of a much lower form of vibration than that manifested by +terrestrial matter; while on others, there appears to be a much higher +vibratory rate than even that manifested by the most subtle forms of +ultra-gaseous matter known to us here. Even on our own globe we can +distinguish between several great class of matter. In addition to the +forms called 'solid,' 'liquid,' and 'gaseous,' respectively, science now +recognizes a fourth plane of matter known as 'ultra-gaseous' matter, and +there are indications of several even finer states of matter, known +under the general term of 'radiant matter.' In fact, modern science sees +'radiant matter' apparently fading away into 'radiant energy.'" + +In view of the facts of modern science concerning the different planes +of substance, matter and energy, it is mere stupidity that ventures to +question the possibility of the existence of great plane of being and +life beyond the range of the ordinary senses of man--planes surrounding +us on all sides, occupying the same space as we do, yet unseen by us, +and we largely unseen by those dwelling upon such planes. + + +The Higher Senses of Men. + +There are found persons who, while admitting the possibility of other +and finer planes of being and life, yet question the possibility of +communication between these planes of existence. They say, with +apparently sound logic, "How is it possible for the human being, with +his ordinary senses, to 'sense' things or being, dwelling on finer +planes of being?" If this were all that there is to the question, we +might well echo "How, indeed?" and agree with the critic. But, this is +not all that there is to it--not even the beginning of the end of the +tale. For not only may things on the finer planes become perceptible to +human beings by means of the lowering of the vibrations of these finer +vibratory objects in certain ways, but human beings may develop and +cultivate an increased power in their senses of sight and hearing, and +thus raise their vibrations so as to "sense" the things of the higher +vibrations; and, still more, human beings may, and often do, develop +and cultivate certain latent powers of "sensing" which are inherent in +every one of us, and thus directly "sense" the sights and sounds of the +higher planes of existence, almost if not quite as clearly as they can +sense the objects and events of their own plane of existence. To +understand how this can be, it is necessary to carefully consider the +question of "sensing" in general, so as to understand just what enables +us to "sense" anything at all. Once understanding this, it is but a step +further to understand this SUPERNORMAL sensing referred to. Let us then +examine this matter of "sensing" in general. + + +The World of Sensation. + +The reports of our sense organs are called "sensations." A sensation is +defined as "an impression, or the consciousness of an impression, made +upon the mind through the medium of a nerve or one of the organs of +sense. The term 'sense' is defined as 'a faculty possessed by animals of +perceiving external objects by means of impressions made upon certain +organs of the body, or of perceiving changes in the condition of the +body.' Our senses have been well said to constitute 'the doors to the +outside world.' Unless our attention is specially directed to the +subject, few of us even begin to realize how completely we are dependent +upon these 'doors' to the outside world" for our knowledge of that +outside world. It is only when we stop to imagine how completely shut +in, or shut out, we would be if all of our sense channels should be +destroyed, that we can even begin to realize just how dependent we are +upon our senses for our knowledge of the world in which we live, and +move, and have our being. + + +A Senseless World. + +A writer on the subject has said: "Psychologists have pointed out to us +the fact that if a human being were born without sense organs, no matter +how perfect a brain he might have, his life would be little more than +that of a plant. Such a person would exist merely in a dreamlike state, +with only the very faintest manifestations of consciousness. His +consciousness would not be able to react in response to the impact of +sensations from the outside world, for there would be no such impact. +And as consciousness depends almost entirely upon the impact of, or +resistance to, outside impressions, his consciousness would be almost +entirely inactive. He would be conscious of his own existence, but would +probably never realize the fact fully, for he would have nothing else +with which to compare himself, and his self-consciousness would never be +aroused by contact with things outside of himself. Such a person would +not have even the memories of previous sensations or experiences to +arouse or heighten his consciousness or thought, and consequently he +would have no imagination to use. He would be, to all intents and +purposes, a living corpse. Helen Keller has only two doors of sensation +closed to her--the sense of sight and the sense of hearing. Touch, +taste, and smell, however were left to her; and each was quickened and +heightened in order to help so far as possible to perform the world of +the defective senses. The reaching of the consciousness of this girl is +considered by science to be akin to a miracle--yet only two senses were +missing. To appreciate the full meaning of the importance of the senses, +one has but to think of Helen Keller as having been also deprived of the +sense of touch." + + +The Elemental Sense. + +Science informs us that all of the five senses of man, viz., the +respective senses of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and smell are but +modifications of one elementary sense namely the sense of touch; and +that the other senses have been gradually evolved from that one +elementary sense. This is seen to be the case when it is realized that +the only way that we "sense" the presence of an outside object--be that +object either a material substance, a vibration of the air, or an +etheric vibration of light--is by that outside object coming in contact, +directly or indirectly, with one or more of our sensory nerves, the +latter conveying the report of the contact to the brain, which +translates the sensation into what is called a "perception." This is +true of the sensations of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and smell, and +of senses higher than these and which as yet are not recognized by +science. Consequently, the consciousness of the presence of an outside +thing arises from contact with that outside thing through the channel of +the sense of touch, or of some of its more complex evolved phases. + + +The Raw Material of Thought. + +From what has been said, it is seen that we can know only those things +concerning the outside world which are capable of being reported to us +by means of sense impressions, simple or complex--all of our thought +regarding the world is made up from "the raw materials of thought" which +psychologists have termed sensations. Consequently, if an individual is +deprived of one or more of his ordinary senses, his knowledge of the +outside world is decreased to just that extent. And, likewise, if the +individual were to be given one or more additional senses, his knowledge +of the world would be increased in the same ratio. The same result, at +least in a certain degree, would be attained if the existing senses of +the individual were to be increased in power so as to register higher +rates of vibration than they now consciously register and record. + + +The Evolution of the Senses. + +This subject of increased sense-powers has always been a fascinating one +for the psychologists, and much speculation has been indulged in +concerning the increased consciousness of mankind were additional senses +opened to it. We ask you to carefully consider the following quotations +from psychologists possessing the "scientific imagination." + +A psychologist says: "All the senses have been evolved from the +elementary sense of Touch. All of our senses are but modified, +specialized, and more complex forms of the sense of Touch. The +elementary life-forms possessed merely the sense of Touch; and that but +faintly developed--but a faint sensitiveness to outside impressions. +Then developed the sense of Taste, from which later evolved the sense of +Smell, the latter even now being closely associated with the former. +Then evolved the sense of Hearing, or the consciousness of the contact +of air vibrations called 'sound.' Then evolved the sense of sight, or +the consciousness of contact with the light waves of the other. And it +is not impossible, or even improbable, that the human race will +eventually develop other and more complex senses--in fact, many even now +claim that the development of extra senses is now under way in the race, +and that the same are now manifesting the presence and their powers in +exceptional cases." + + +Unfoldment of New Senses + +The same writer continues as follows: "Even as it is man is able to +perceive only a limited number of sound vibrations--there are many sound +vibrations above and below his scale, and which he is unable to +perceive, but which are registered by delicate instruments. Likewise, +man is able to perceive only a limited range of light vibrations, there +being enormous fields of such vibrations above and below his range. +Again, man is unable to sense electrical waves, or magnetic +waves--though, theoretically, he should be able to sense these as well +as light waves, the difference between these respective fields of +etheric vibrations being simply different rates of vibration. Imagine +what a new world would be opened to man if he could sense the waves of +electricity. In that case he could 'see' things as far away from him as +the waves of electricity could travel, and even though solid objects +intervened, as in the case of the X-Rays. In such a case a man might +actually 'see' things at the other side of the world, by means of +'wireless electrical waves.' Theoretically these things are possible, +providing that man's optical nerves are rendered more sensitive, or +provided that he evolves a new set of sensory nerves and instruments of +impression." + + +Discovery of New Worlds. + +Another psychologist says: "If a new sense or two were added to the +present normal number in man, that which is now the phenomenal world for +all of us might, for all that we know, burst into something amazingly +different and wider, in consequence of the additional revelations of +these new senses." Another authority has said: "It does not seem at all +improbable that there are properties of matter of which none of our +senses can take immediate cognizance, and which other beings might be +able to see in the same manner that we are sensible to light, sound, +etc." Another writer has said: "We know that our sensory nerves are +capable of transmitting to the brain only a part of the phenomena of the +universe. Our senses give us only a section of the world's phenomena. +Our senses usher only certain phenomena into the presence of our minds. +If we had three or four new senses added, this might appear like a new +world to us; we might become conscious of a vast number of phenomena +which at present never have any effect upon our nervous system. It is +not possible to imagine a race of beings whose senses do not resemble +ours, inhabiting other worlds." + + +Transcendental Senses + +Another writer has drawn an interesting picture, which is based upon a +conjecture which is scientifically valid, as follows: "The late +Professor James once suggested as a useful exercise for young students a +consideration of the changes which would be worked in our ordinary world +if the various branches of our receiving instruments happened to +exchange duties; if, for instance, we heard all colors, and saw all +sounds. All this is less mad than it seems. Music is but an +interpretation of certain vibrations undertaken by the ear; and color is +but an interpretation of other vibrations undertaken by the eye. Were +such an alteration of our senses to take place, the world would still be +sending us the same messages, but we should be interpreting them +differently. Beauty would still be ours, though speaking in another +tongue. The birds' song would then strike our retina as pageant of +color; we should see all the magical tones of the wind, hear as a great +fugue the repeated and harmonized greens of the forest, the cadences of +stormy skies. Did we realize how slight an adjustment of our own organs +is needed to initiate us into such a world, we should perhaps be less +contemptuous of those mystics who tell us in moments of transcendental +consciousness they 'heard flowers that sounded, and saw notes that +shone'; or that they have experienced rare moments of consciousness in +which the senses were fused organs is needed to initiate us into such a +world into a single and ineffable act of perception, in which color and +sound were known as aspects of the same thing." + + +We Sense Only Vibratory Motion. + +In assimilating the strange and wonderful conceptions of the +psychologists above quoted, concerning the possibility of a new world of +sensation arising from the possession of new channels of sense +impression, we must never lose sight of the basic fact that all +SENSATIONS RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH VIBRATORY MOTION. An eminent +scientific authority has said regarding this: "The only way the external +world affects the nervous system is by means of vibratory motion. Light +is vibratory motion; Sound is vibratory motion; Heat is vibratory +motion; Touch is vibratory motion; Taste and Smell are vibratory motion. +The world is known to us simply by virtue of, and in relation to, the +vibratory motion of its particles. Those vibratory motions are +appreciated and continued by the nervous system, and by it brought at +length to the mind's perception." + + +The Higher Planes of Nature + +In view of the facts and principles above set forth and considered, we +may begin to see that there is nothing "unnatural" in the hypothesis +that there may be reports conveyed to the consciousness of man by means +of higher vibrations than those of ordinary sound, or ordinary sight, +providing that man has either (1) highly developed his ordinary senses +of sight, hearing, or touch to a degree sufficiently high to register +these higher vibrations; or else has evolved and unfolded into +consciousness certain latent faculties of sense-impression which are +lying dormant in the great masses of mankind. In fact, the thoughtful +person will be forced to admit that this new knowledge of the nature of +sensations, and of its relation to vibratory motion, renders extremely +probable the truth of the great body of reports of such so-called +extra-conscious knowledge which the experience of the race has furnished +from the beginning of human history down to the present time. Such a +person will see that it is not a sign of "credulity" for a person to +accept such reports, so universally set forth; but that, rather, it is a +sign of "credulity" for a person to accept blindly the dogmatic +assertions of the materialistic sceptics to the effect that "there is no +such thing possible in the natural world, under natural world, under +natural laws--the whole thing is delusion or else deliberate fraud." +Such "know-it-all" persons are usually found to really "know much that +is not true," and to lack knowledge of much that is true, regarding +Nature, her realm and her laws. + + +An Appeal To Reason. + +Concluding these statements, let us say that the student of this book +will find nothing contained within this book which is contrary to +Nature's laws and principles. He will nowhere in it be asked to suspend +the exercise of his reason, and to accept as facts things which violate +all of Nature's laws. Instead, he will find at each point full natural +explanations of even the most wonderful phenomena; and the appeal to +accept same will be made always to his reason, and not to his blind +faith or unreasoning belief. The student is urged to build his knowledge +of this important subject upon this solid rock of natural law and fact, +and not upon the shifting and sinking sands of mere dogmatic assertion +and appeal to assumed authority ancient or modern. + + + + +PART II + +Mental Vibrations and Transmissions + + +In the category of Nature's Finer Forces must be included that class of +manifestations which are generally known as Telepathy, Thought +Transference, Thought Force, etc., all of which are based upon the fact +that there is present in all such mental states as Thought, Emotion, +Desire, etc., a certain rate of vibratory motion, which motion is +capable of being radiated from the mind of the person manifesting them +in such power and force that they may be registered with more or less +distinctness upon the minds of other persons are at a greater or less +distance from the first person. In the more common forms of its +manifestation, such mental force or power is known as Thought Force, +Mental Influence, etc., and in its more pronounced and less common +phases it is known as Telepathy, Thought Transference, etc., but the +basic principle is precisely the same in all of such cases, simple or +complex though their manifestations may be. + + +The Higher Forces. + +We may say here, frankly and plainly, however, that the advanced +occultists regard this class of phenomena as comparatively simple and +elementary, and therefore not fully entitled to be included in the same +category with the higher phases of Nature's Finer Forces, such as, for +instance, Clairvoyance, Psychometry, Communication with the Higher +Planes, etc. But notwithstanding this, we are of the opinion that any +and every one of the finer forces of nature, i.e., any of the forces +which are over and above the plane upon which the ordinary senses of +man, normally developed, ordinarily function and operate, should be +placed in one general category of the Higher Forces of Nature, +particularly in a work of this kind designed for the instruction of the +general public upon these important subjects. Accordingly, these lesser +manifestations of the finer forces in the natural world shall be +carefully considered in this part of this book, so that the student may +become acquainted with the scientific principles upon which they are +based, and may be enabled to develop the power of manifesting such +powers if he choose to do so; and that he may understand the nature of +such forces and powers when they are manifested by other persons. + + +Chitta, or Mind Substance. + +The Hindu Teachings hold that that which we call "Mind" is not an +intangible something different from anything else in Nature, but that, +on the contrary, it forms a part of Nature's general manifestation, and +is a substantial thing. The Hindus have given to this Mind Substance the +name of Chitta. Without going into metaphysical discussion, or entering +into technical details concerning this Mind Substance or Chitta, we may +say that the Hindus believe it to be one phase of the great +Manifestation which we call Nature--just as that which we call Matter +is another phase of Manifestation--and, like Matter, having its own +particular kind of force, or energy, its own rates of vibrations, and +its own attribute of radiating its vibratory force or energy over space. +Chitta manifests its activity in creating Thought, Emotions, etc., and +also in receiving impressions from the outside world which it translates +into perceptions and ideals. Chitta, or Mind Substance, is not regarded +by the Hindus as being identical with the Soul, or the Ego; but, on the +contrary, they regard it as being an instrument for the expression of +the activity of the Ego, or Soul, just as the Body is another kind of +instrument. Both Body and Mind are regarded as being intended for the +use of the Ego or Soul, and not as identical with the latter. We shall +not discuss these distinctions further in this book, this subject being +apart from the general field and scope of the present work. + + +What Modern Science Says. + +There are many to whom this conception of the vibration energy of Chitta +or Mind Substance may seem strange. But such persons will be still more +surprised, perhaps, when they are told that modern science has +practically admitted the general truth contained in the Hindu teachings +concerning the same, though modern science seems to cloak the facts of +the case in technical terms so that the ordinary person is unable to +comprehend the real facts dwelling beneath these terms. To this latter +class we specially commend the following statement made by Professor +Ochorowicz, the eminent European scientist, a few years ago. Professor +Ochoriwicz says: + + +A Living Dynamic Focus. + +"Every living being is a dynamic focus. A dynamic focus tends ever to +propagate the motion that is proper to it. Propagated motion becomes +transformed according to the medium it traverses. Motion always tends to +propagate itself. Therefore, when we see work of any kind--mechanical, +electrical, nervic, or psychic--disappear without visible effort, then +of two things, one happens, namely, either a transmission or a +transformation. Where does the first end, and where does the second +begin? In an identical medium there is only TRANSMISSION; in a different +medium there is TRANSFORMATION. + +"You send an electric current through a thick wire. You have the +current, but you do not perceive any other force. But cut that thick +wire, and connect the ends by means of a fine wire, and this fine wire +will grow hot--there will be a TRANSFORMATION of a part of the current +into HEAT. Take a pretty strong current, and interpose a wire still more +resistant, or a very thin carbon rod, and the carbon will emit LIGHT. A +part of the current, then, is transformed into heat and light. The light +acts in every direction around about, first visibly as light, then +invisibly as heat and electric current. Hold a magnet near it. If the +magnet is weak and movable, in the form of a magnetic needle, the beam +of light will cause it to deviate; if it is strong and immovable, it +will in turn cause the beam of light to deviate. AND ALL THIS FROM A +DISTANCE, WITHOUT CONTACT, WITHOUT SPECIAL CONDUCTORS. + + +Dynamic Correlate of Thought. + +"A process that is at once chemical, physical and psychical, goes on in +the brain. A complex action of this kind is propagated through the gray +brain matter, as waves are propagated in water. Regarded on its +physiological side, an idea is only a vibration, a vibration that is +propagated, yet which does not pass out of the medium in which it can +exist as such. It is propagated only as far as other vibrations allow. +It is propagated more widely if it assumes the character which +subjectively we call emotive. But it cannot go beyond without being +transformed. Nevertheless, like force in general, it cannot remain in +isolation, and it escapes in disguise. + +"Thought stays at home, as the chemical action of a battery remains in +the battery; it is represented by its dynamic correlate, called in the +case of the battery a 'current,' and in the case of the brain, I know +not what; but whatever its name may be, it is THE DYNAMIC CORRELATE OF +THOUGHT. I have chosen the name 'dynamic correlate.' There is something +more than that; the universe is neither dead nor void. + +"A force that is transmitted meets other forces, and if it is +transformed only little by little it usually limits itself to modifying +another force at its own cost, though without suffering materially +thereby. This is the case particularly with forces that are persistent, +concentrated, well seconded by their medium. It is the case with the +physiological equilibrium, nervic force, psychic force, ideas, emotions, +tendencies. These modify environing forces, without themselves +disappearing. They are imperceptibly transformed, AND IF THE NEXT MAN IS +OF A NATURE EXCEPTIONALLY WELL ADAPTED TO THEM, THEY GAIN IN INDUCTIVE +ACTION." + + +Answer to Skeptical Critics + +The two most likely objections advanced against this conception by +sceptical critics are as follows: "(1) The mental vibratory motion, or +vibratory waves, are not known to science, nor recorded on scientific +instruments such as the galvanometer. What is the rate of such +vibrations, and what is their general character? (2) Granted the +existence of such vibratory energy, or thought-waves, how and by means +of what channel does the second person receive them from the first +person? How are they registered or recorded?" These objections are +capable of being met in a scientific manner, to the satisfaction of any +fair-minded critic or investigator. We shall now give you, briefly, the +gist of the answer of science to the aforesaid objections. + + +The World of Vibrations + +It is true that the scientific instruments of the laboratory, such as +the galvanometer, do not record thought vibrations. This, because such +instruments are capable of registering and recording on certain rates +and modes of vibratory energy. Thought vibrations are registered only by +their appropriate instruments, namely, the Chitta of Mind substance of +living persons. As to the "general character and rate of vibration" of +these waves of mental force, we can only say that their general +character is that of "mental force" as opposed to "physical force." + +As to their rate of vibration, we can only say that this is not +precisely known, not having as yet been definitely ascertained; but it +should be added that THERE IS PLENTY ROOM FOR THESE VIBRATIONS in the +great field of vibratory energy. Read the following paragraphs, and +decide this last matter for yourself. + + +Uncharted Seas of Vibration. + +The following quotations from eminent scientists will serve to give the +student a general idea of the views of science upon the question of the +possibility of the existence and presence of vibratory energy of kinds +and characters as yet unknown to science: + +The first scientist says: "There is much food for speculation in the +thought that there exists sound waves that no human ear can hear, and +color waves that no eye can see. The long, dark, soundless space between +40,000 and 400,000,000,000,000 vibrations per second, and the infinity +of range beyond 700,000,000,000,000 vibrations per second, where light +ceases, in the universe of motion, makes it possible to indulge in +speculation." The second scientist says: "There is no gradation between +the most rapid undulations or tremblings that produce our sensation of +sound, and the lowest of those which give rise to our sensations of +gentlest warmth. There is a huge gap between them, wide enough to +include another world of motion, all lying between our world of sound +and our world of heat and light. And there is no good reason whatever +for supposing that matter is incapable of such intermediate activity, or +that such activity may not give rise to intermediate sensations, +provided that there are organs for taking up and sensifying these +movements." + +The third scientist says: "The knowledge we gain by experiment brings +home to us what a miserably imperfect piece of mechanism our bodies are. +The ear can detect the slow-footed sound vibrations that come to us at +the rate of between 40 and 40,000 a second. But the whole of space may +be quivering and palpitating with waves at all sorts of varying speeds, +and our senses will tell us nothing of them until we get them coming to +us at the inconceivable speed of 400,000,000,000,000 a second, when +again we respond to them and appreciate them in the form of light." + +The fourth scientist says: "The first indications of warmth come to us +when the vibrations reach the rate of 35,000,000,000,000 per second. +When the vibrations reach 450,000,000,000,000 the lowest visible light +rays manifest. Then come the orange rays, the golden yellow, the pure +yellow, the greenish yellow, the pure green, the greenish blue, the +ocean blue, the cyanic blue, the indigo, and finally the violet, the +highest degree of light which the human eye can register, and which +occurs when the vibrations reach the rate of 750,000,000,000 per second. +Then come the ultra-violet rays, invisible to human sight but registered +by chemical media. In this ultra-violet region lie the X-Rays, and the +other recently discovered high degree rays; also the actinic rays which, +while invisible to the eye, register on the photographic plate, sunburn +one's face, blister one's nose, and even cause violent explosions in +chemical substances exposed to them, as well as act upon the green +leaves of plants, causing the chemical transformation of carbonic acid +and water into sugar and starches. These forms of 'dark light,' that +is, light too high in degree to be perceived by the human eye, are but +faint indications of the existence of still higher and still finer +vibrations of substance and energy." + + +The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument. + +Having seen that the first question of the sceptical critics is capable +of being answered in the scientific spirit, and by ideas based upon +scientific investigation, we now turn to the second question of the same +critics, viz.: "Granted the existence of such vibratory energy, or +thought-waves, how and by means of what channel does the second person +receive these from the first person? How are they registered or +recorded?" This same question is also implied in the concluding sentence +of one of the scientists above quoted, viz.: "There is no good reason +whatever for supposing that matter is incapable of such intermediate +activity, or that such activity may not give rise to intermediate +sensations, provided that there are organs for taking up and sensifying +these movements." Let us see what science has to tell us regarding the +provision of Nature for the reception and "sensing" of this class of +vibratory energy. And the easiest way to ascertain the report of science +regarding this important matter is to consider carefully what +representative leading scientists have said concerning the same in their +writings or public addresses. We call your attention to the following +quotations from such sources. + + +A Great Scientist's Theory. + +Let us begin with that great master of modern science, Sir William +Crookes, the inventor of the celebrated "Crookes' Tubes," without which +the discovery of the X-Ray and Radio-Activity would have been +impossible. Several years ago, this eminent scientist, addressing the +Royal Society, at Bristol, England,--a gathering made up of +distinguished scientists from all over the world, most of the members +being extremely sceptical concerning occult phenomena--said to the +brilliant gathering: "Were I now introducing for the first time these +inquiries in the world of science, I should choose a starting point +different from that of old (where we formerly began). It would be well +to begin with Telepathy; with that fundamental law, as I believe it to +be, that thoughts and images may be transferred from one mind to another +without the agency of the recognized organs of sense--that knowledge may +enter the human mind without being communicated in any hitherto known or +recognized ways. * * * If Telepathy takes place we have two physical +facts, viz., (a) the physical change in the brain of A, the transmitter, +and the analogous physical change in the brain of B, the recipient of +the transmitted impression. Between these two physical events there must +exist a train of physical causes. * * * It is unscientific to call in +the aid of mysterious agencies, when with every fresh advance in +knowledge it is shown that ether vibrations have powers and attributes +abundantly able to meet any demand--even the transmission of thought. + +"It is supposed by some physiologists that the essential cells of nerves +do not actually touch, but are separated by a narrow gap which widens in +sleep while it narrows almost to extinction during mental activity. +THIS CONDITION IS SO SINGULARLY LIKE A BRANLY OR LODGE COHERER [a +device which led to the discovery of wireless telegraphy] AS TO SUGGEST +A FURTHER ANALOGY. The structure of brain and nerve being similar, it is +conceivable that there may be present masses of such nerve coherers in +the brain, whose special function it may be to receive impulses brought +from without, through the connecting sequence of ether waves of +appropriate order of magnitude. Roentgen has familiarized us with an +order of vibrations of extreme minuteness as compared with the smallest +waves with which we have hitherto been acquainted; and there is no +reason to suppose that we have here reached the limit of frequency. It +is known that the action of thought is accompanied by certain molecular +movements in the brain, and here we have physical vibrations capable +from their extreme minuteness of acting direct upon individual +molecules, while their rapidity approaches that of internal and external +movements of the atoms themselves. A formidable range of phenomena must +be scientifically sifted before we effectually grasp a faculty so +strange, so bewildering, and for ages so inscrutable, as the direct +action of mind upon mind." + + +Human Electro-Magnetism + +Professor Bain, another eminent authority, tells us: "The structure of +the nervous substances, and the experiments made upon the nerves and +nerve-centres, establish beyond a doubt certain peculiarities as +belonging to the force that is exercised by the brain. This force is of +a current nature; that is to say, a power generated at one part of the +structure is conveyed along an intervening substance and discharged at +some other part. The different forms of electricity and magnetism have +made us familiar with this kind of action." + +Professor Draper, another eminent authority, says: "I find that the +cerebrum is absolutely analogous to in construction to any other nervous +arc. It is composed of centripetal and centrifugal fibres, having also +registering ganglia. If in other nervous arcs the structure is merely +automatic, and can display no phenomena of itself, but requires the +influence of an external agent--the optical apparatus inert save under +the influence of light, the auditory save under the impression of +sound--the cerebrum, being precisely analogous in its elementary +structure, presupposes the existence of some agent to act through it." + +Prof. M. P. Hatfield has said: "The arrangement of the nerve-envelopes +is so like that of the best constructed electrical cables that we cannot +help thinking that both were constructed to conduct something very much +alike. I know that there are those who stoutly maintain that nerve force +is not electricity, and it is not in the senses that an electrical +battery is not the same thing as a live man; but, nevertheless, +nerve-force is closely allied to that wonderful thing that for want of a +better and clearer understanding we agree to call 'electricity.'" + + +Human Etheric Force. + +Professor Haddock, a popular writer along the lines of scientific +psychology and kindred subjects, in a part of his work in which he was +considering the idea that thought may be communicated by means of +ether-vibrations, forcibly says: "The ether is accepted by science as a +reality, and as a medium for light, heat, electricity, magnetism, etc. +The nervous system is certainly comparable to an electric battery with +connecting wires. Communications of thought and feeling without the +mediation of sense-perceptions as commonly understood, is now +established. Inanimate objects exert, now and then, 'strange +influences.' People certainly carry with them a personal atmosphere. The +representation of the condition of these facts by a psychic field, +compared to the magnetic or electric field, becomes, therefore, if not +plausible, at least convenient. As such a 'field' exists surrounding the +sun, so may a 'field' be assumed as surrounding each human individual. +'We have already strong grounds for believing that we live in a medium +which conveys to-and-fro movements to us from the sun, and that these +movements are electro-magnetic, and that all the transformation of light +and heat, and indeed the phenomena of life, are due to the electrical +energy which comes to us across the vacuum which exists between us and +the sun--a vacuum which is pervaded by the ether, which is a fit medium +for the transmission of electro-magnetic waves.' By means, then, of a +similar theory applied to mind and brain and body, we may find +reasonable explanations of many otherwise insoluble mysteries of life, +and, which is of more importance, deduce certain suggestions for the +practical regulation of life in the greatest individual interest." + + +The Brain-Battery. + +The same writer says: "All states of body and mind involve constant +molecular and chemical change. The suggestion arises that the brain, +with its millions of cells and its inconceivable changes in substance, +may be regarded as a transmitting and receiving battery. The brain being +a kind of battery, and the nerves being conductors of released stored-up +energy to different parts of the body, by a kind of action similar to +the actions of electricity and magnetism, it is suggested that, either +by means of the ether, or of some still finer form of matter, discharges +of brain energy may be conducted beyond the limits of the body. If the +nerve-track corresponds to wires, this refined medium may correspond to +the ether-field supposed to be employed in wireless telegraphy. As +electrical movements are conducted without wires, or other visible +media, so may brain-discharges be conveyed beyond the mechanism of the +battery, without the intervention of nerves--except as they may +constitute a part of the battery. Generally speaking, such discharges +would originate in two ways, viz., by direct mental action, or by mental +or physical states--perhaps by a combination." + + +A Peculiar Organ + +So much for the conceptions of modern western science, which agree in +the main with those of the ancient oriental occultists, although of +course different names and terms are employed. But, we think it worth +while to call your attention to the fact that the western scientists +have failed to note the significant presence of a peculiar organ in the +human body, which is regarded as most important in its functions and +offices by the oriental teachers, and which we believe has a very close +connection to the subject just discussed by the western scientists. We +refer to that strange organ or gland known to western science as the +Pineal Gland. Let us see just what this is. + + +The Pineal Gland + +The Pineal Gland is a mass of nervous substance which is found located +in the human brain in a position near the middle of the skull, almost +directly above the extreme top of the spinal column. It is shaped like a +small cone, and is of a reddish-gray color. It lies in front of the +cerebellum, and is attached to the third ventricle of the brain. It +contains a small quantity of peculiar particles of a gritty, sand-like +substance, which is commonly known as "brain sand." It derives its +scientific name from its shape, which resembles a pine-cone. Western +physiologists are at sea regarding the function and office of this +interesting organ, or gland, and the text books generally content +themselves with stating that "the functions of the Pineal Gland are not +understood." The oriental occultists, on the other hand, claim that the +Pineal Gland, with its peculiar arrangement of nerve-cell corpuscles, +and its tiny grains of "brain-sand," is intimately associated with +certain forms of the transmission and reception of waves of mental +vibrations. Western students of occultism have been struck with the +remarkable resemblance between the Pineal Gland and a certain part of +the receiving apparatus employed in wireless telegraphy, the latter also +containing small particles which bear a close resemblance to the +"brain-sand" of the Pineal Gland; and this fact is often urged by them +to substantiate the theory of the oriental occultists concerning the +function and office of this interesting organ of the human body which is +located in the brain of man. + + +Transmission of Thought. + +Many other facts set forth by modern western science could be cited in +our consideration of the question of the existence of any possible organ +for the reception of thought vibrations, but it is thought that +sufficient evidence of this kind has already been submitted to your +attention--sufficient to remove any reasonable doubts, and to give the +student at least a clear and open mind on the subject. Summing up such +evidence, we may say that modern science is fast approaching the +position which is so well expressed by Camille Flammarion, the eminent +French scientist, as follows: "The action of one mind upon another at a +distance--the transmission of thought, mental suggestion, communication +at a distance--all these are not more extraordinary than the action of +the magnet on iron, the influence of the moon on the sea, the +transportation of the human voice by electricity, the revolution of the +chemical constituents of a star by the analysis of its light, or, +indeed, all the wonders of contemporary science. Only these psychic +communications are of a more elevated kind, and may serve to put us on +the track of a knowledge of human nature. What is certain is this: That +Telepathy can and ought to be henceforth considered by Science as an +incontestible reality; that minds are able to act upon each other +without the intervention of the senses; that psychic force exists, +though its nature is yet unknown." + + +A General Principle. + +At this point we wish to impress upon the minds of the students of this +book that what has been above said regarding that class of mental +communications generally classed under the head of Telepathy also +applies to many much higher phases of occult phenomena and psychic +manifestations. In fact, this is one of the reasons why we have paid +such close attention to the scientific evidence substantiating this +class of phenomena. It is not too much to say that in what has been said +in the foregoing pages there is to be found a scientific basis for the +phenomenon of "spirit communication," at least in many of its phases. It +is but a step in thought--and a natural and easy step at that--from the +matter of the communication of thought from the mind of one person or +the material plane of life to another person on the same plane, on to +the matter of the communication of thought from the mind of an +individual entity on a higher plane of life to a second person who is +abiding on the lower material plane occupied by us at this stage of our +existence. It is seen that the difference consists largely in the matter +of the degree and rate of vibratory energy employed, and the preparation +of a proper receiving instrument for the reception and translation of +such messages. This phase of the subject will be considered in fuller +detail in a subsequent portion of this book. + + +Transformation of Vibrations. + +One of the things which seem to greatly puzzle the average student of +the subject of mental vibrations, and thought-transference, is that +which may be called "thought waves." The student is unable to conceive +of a wave of "thought" being projected into the air, and then traveling +along until it reaches the mind of other persons. The difficulty, upon +analysis, is seen to consist of the inability to conceive of "thought" +as being a material substance capable of traveling in "waves." It is no +wonder that the student finds this conception difficult, for there is no +such thing as "thought" traveling in this way. The phenomenon of thought +transference is accounted for scientifically in quite another manner, as +we shall see in a moment. The student is advised to carefully note this +distinction, for upon its understanding depends greatly the intelligent +comprehension of the entire subject of thought vibrations and +thought-transference. + + +Example of Electric Light + +Perhaps this matter may be best explained by means of illustrations of +the operation of electricity and light--electric vibrations and light +vibrations. In both cases the secret of the transmission of the +vibrations or waves of vibratory energy may be summed up in the word +"TRANSFORMATION." For instance: When we transmit electric vibrations +over a fine wire or thread of carbon, the electric vibrations are +transformed into light vibrations and manifest as "electric light." In +another form of transmission the electric vibrations are transformed +into "electric heat." But this is merely one phase of the +transformation; consider carefully the more complex phases, as follows: +We speak into the receiver of a telephone and the sound vibrations +produced by our voice are transformed into electrical vibrations and in +that form travel over the telephone wire; arriving at the other end of +the wire, these electric vibrations enter into the receiver, and are +there transformed into sound vibrations, and as such are heard by the +person holding the receiver. Now note this: the sound vibrations do not +travel at all; instead, they are transformed into electric waves, which +in turn are transformed at the receiving end of the line into sound +vibrations once more. And unless the receiving apparatus be present, and +properly adjusted, there is no second transformation at all; and in such +case the electric vibrations remain such. + + +Example of Wireless Telegraphy. + +Likewise, in the case of the wireless telegraphy, the electric energy +produced by the sending instrument is transformed into subtle and finer +etheric waves, which travel to the receiving instrument, and are there +transformed into electric waves, the latter producing physical changes +in the receiving apparatus which enable them to be read by the observer. +In the case of wireless telephony there is still more complex process of +transformation, as follows: the speaker conveys sound vibrations into +the instrument; these are transformed into electric vibrations; and the +latter into the etheric vibrations which travel through space to the +receiver. Reaching the receiver, the etheric vibrations are transformed +into ordinary electric vibrations, and these in turn into sound waves +capable of being sensed by the listener. + + +Example of Light Waves. + +The same process is detected in the transmission of what we call light +waves. The activities manifested by the substance of the sun set up +certain vibrations which we call "light vibrations." These are +communicated to the ether in the form of so-called "light waves" but +which are merely etheric waves of a certain rate of vibration. These +waves travel through space and are transformed into "light" only when +they reach some material substance capable of receiving and reflecting +their vibrations. Science tells us that empty space is perfectly DARK, +and that light manifests only when the etheric light vibrations come in +contact with material substance and are there transformed into "light." +Light, as "light" does not travel from the sun--what we know as "light" +is simply the result of the transformation of certain etheric waves into +"light" by reason of their contact with material substances. + + +Transformation of Mental Vibrations + +Now for the analogy. Mental vibrations are so only when they remain in +their own uninterrupted medium of channel of activity, i.e., the brain +and the nervous system of the individual. Many hold that they are able +to leap over the barrier of flesh separating two persons when such +persons are in immediate physical contact, and the conditions are of a +certain kind; but as a rule they do not do so. But, as all investigators +know, mental vibrations are capable of being transformed into some +subtle form of etheric vibrations, and the latter when coming in contact +with the nervous system of other persons may be again transformed, this +time into mental vibrations which produced thoughts, feelings and mental +images in the minds of the second persons or persons, corresponding with +these mental states in the first person. Think over this carefully, +until you grasp the idea fully. + + +Vibrational Attunement + +And here we find another startling correspondence between the phenomena +of wireless telegraphy and that of thought transference or transmission +of mental vibrations. We allude to the fact that while a wireless +telegraphic sending instrument may be sending forth vibrations of the +strongest power, its messages are capable of being received or "picked +up" only by those instruments which are "in tune" with the sending +instrument to at least a certain degree; to all other instruments, those +which are not "in tune" with the sending instrument, there is no message +perceptible. Precisely this same state of affairs is found to prevail in +the realm of mental vibrations and thought transmission. The individual +receives only such messages as emanate from instruments with which he is +"in tune"--to all the rest he is deaf and unconscious. But once "in +tune" with the higher vibrations of the mental realm, he will receive +every message traveling on that particular plane at that particular +time, unless he deliberately shut them out. We shall see how this works +out in ordinary life, when we consider the general subject of Telepathy +and Thought Transference in the succeeding Chapter. + + +In Tune With Higher Planes + +But, in connection with the above statement of the "in tune" law or rule +of manifestation, we wish to call to the attention of the student the +important fact that the same law prevails in the case of communications +from the higher planes of existence--the so-called "spirit +communications" and other messages of this kind reaching individuals on +our own plane of existence. It is only when the individual on the +"earth plane" becomes "in tune" with the sending mental instrument of +the entity abiding on a higher plane of existence, that it is able to +"pick up" the message being sent to earth. Even the same individual is +often unable to "catch" the messages at one time, while at other times +he experiences no difficulty whatsoever. An understanding of this +fact--this law or rule of manifestation--will throw a great light over +many dark places of misunderstanding and perplexity concerning certain +phases of occult and psychic phenomena. This feature of such phenomena +will be considered in detail in subsequent parts of this book. + + +The Two Key-Words. + +Concluding our consideration of the "just how" of the transmission of +thoughts, messages, and "psychograms" between two minds, be they both on +earth plane, or one of the two on the higher planes, we would say: +"Always remember the two Key-Words, namely TRANSFORMATION and +ATTUNEMENT." These two Key-Words will enable you to unlock many doors of +thought on these subjects--doors which otherwise will remain closed to +you. + + + + +PART III + +THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE + + +The most elementary and simple form in which mental vibrations are +transmitted is that which may be called Thought Transference. In the +category of Thought Transference may be included two quite general +classes, as follows: (1) Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, +and (2) Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, commonly known as +Telepathy. In this part of this book both of these general classes of +Thought Transference shall be considered in some detail. + + +Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. + +Mental vibrations emanating from the brain of the individual take on the +form of wave-like movements in the ether, which are accordingly known as +"thought-waves." These thought-waves are constantly being sent forth +from the brains of all persons, and after being sent forth they spread +in space from the immediate neighborhood of the person originating them, +to a distance proportioned to the strength and power energizing the +original mental state. These thought-waves have the power of awakening +and arousing into activity corresponding mental states in other persons +coming within their field of force, according to the laws of Mental +Induction. It should be noted here that the activity aroused in the mind +of the receiving person is accomplished by the setting into vibratory +motion the Chitta or Mind-substance of that person, just as the +receiving diaphragm of the telephone is set vibrating at the same rate +as that of the sending instrument, and thus the original sound-waves are +reproduced. + + +Thought Waves + +Thought-waves are manifested in various forms, modes, and phases, and in +different degrees of power. Some are emanated without any clearly +defined desire or intent to accomplish certain ends, while others are +charged with strong desire focused to a definite point by clear-cut +ideas of ends sought to be accomplished. The latter, however, are +usually entitled to be classed among the "involuntary" phases of Thought +Transference, because the senders are generally unaware that +thought-waves have an actual effect upon the minds of other persons; +their thoughts and mental states arising in accordance with their +feelings, desires, and general aims. Where the individual has learned +that thought is an active power, he may deliberately send forth his +thought-waves directed toward the person or persons whom he wishes to +affect and influence. + +The student must remember, however, that there is a great difference in +the power and effective activity between thought-waves sent forth under +different circumstances. Some are sent forth idly, and with no focused +power or energy of desire and feeling, and such naturally are weak in +effect upon others. Others are sent forth vitalized with strong desire +and feeling, and focused with a clear ideal and mental picture, and, +consequently, exert a far greater degree of effect upon the minds of +others with whom they come in contact. The analogy of the waves of +electricity holds good here, for just as the electric power may be +strong or weak, as the case may be, so may the mental force be strong or +weak under different circumstances, and in different individuals. + + +Vibratory Thought Force + +The vibratory force of thought-waves persist for some time after their +original emanation. Here, also we have analogies on the physical plane, +as follows: The heat of a room continues for some time after the fire +which originally caused it has ceased to burn. Likewise, the air of a +room may manifest the perfume of a flower, or extract, long after the +latter has been removed from the room. Again, rays of light persist in +existence long after the star manifesting them has been blotted out of +existence. In the same way thought-vibrations continue to manifest in a +place, large or small though its space may be, long after the original +sender has passed from that plane--perhaps even long after he has passed +from earth life. + + +Mental Atmospheres + +A well known American writer on this subject has said concerning this +point: "There are many places today filled with the thought-vibrations +of minds long since passed out of the body. There are places filled with +the strong vibrations of tragedies long since enacted there. Every place +has a mental atmosphere of its own, the same arising from the +thought-vibrations set in motion by the various persons who have +inhabited or occupied them. Every city has its own mental atmosphere +which has its effect upon persons moving into them. Some are lively, +some dull, some progressive, some old-fogyish, some moral, some +immoral--the result of the character of the early settlers and leading +spirits, of the place in question. Persons moving into these towns are +affected by the mental atmospheres thereof, and either sink to the +general level, or else, if strong enough, help to change the mental tone +of the place. Sometimes a change in conditions bring a large influx of +new people, to a town, and the mental waves of the newcomers tend to +bring about a marked change in the local mental atmosphere. These facts +have been noticed by many observing people who often have not been +familiar with the principles underlying and producing the facts which +the observers have so clearly discerned." + + +The Contagion of Thought. + +The same writer says, along the same general lines: "Many have of course +noticed the differing mental atmospheres of stores, offices, and other +places of business. Some of such places give one an air of confidence +and trust; others create a feeling of suspicion and distrust; some +convey an impression of active, wideawake management, while others +impress one as being behind the times, and suffering from a want of +alert, active management. These differing mental atmospheres are caused +by the different prevailing mental attitudes of the owners of the +respective establishments. The managers of business places send forth +thought-waves of their own, and their employees naturally falling into +the pace set for them also send forth similar vibrations, and before +long the whole place is vibrating on a certain scale. A change of +management soon produces a marked change in the entire mental atmosphere +of the place. In the same way, we notice the mental atmospheres of the +houses we happen to visit; in this way we become conscious of an entire +mental scale of many notes, the notes being sounded unconsciously by the +minds of the occupants of the houses. From some thresholds radiate +harmony, while others breathe the spirit of inharmony. Some radiate +emotional warmth, while others chill one like an iceberg, by reason of +the emotional coldness of the dwellers therein. Likewise, the low +quarters of our cities, the dens of vice, and the haunts of dissipation +vibrate with the character of the thought and feeling of those +inhabiting them. And, often, the weak-willed visitor is thus tempted. In +the same way, certain other places are charged with the vibrations of +strong, helpful, elevating mental states, which tend to lift up and +elevate, energize and stimulate the minds and feelings of those visiting +these places. Thought and feeling are contagious, by reason of the laws +of mental vibration and mental induction." + + +Mental Whirlpools. + +The contagion of thought-vibrations is manifested by such vibrations +coming into contact with the minds of other persons within the field of +mental induction of the first person, and there setting up similar +vibrations. We know that orators, actors, preachers and others +addressing audiences of persons, send forth strong mental currents +which tend to awaken corresponding vibrations in the minds of their +hearers. We weep, smile, grow angry, feel happy, according to the +character of the thought-waves, of the person on the platform or the +stage, providing that we accept the same. And, according to the same +principle, persons scattered over large areas are influenced and +affected in the same way by whirlpools of mental vibrations set into +original motion by some strong, masterful public man. A writer has said +concerning this point: + + +Mental Tidal Waves + +"We know how great waves of feeling spread over a town, city, or county, +sweeping people off their feet, and causing them to lose their balance. +Great waves of political enthusiasm, or war-spirit or prejudice for or +against certain people, or groups of people, sweep over places and cause +men to act in a manner which they afterward often regret when they come +to themselves and consider the matter in the light of cold reason. +People are swayed by demagogues or magnetic leaders who wish to capture +their votes or patronage; and they are often led into acts of mob +violence, or similar atrocities, by yielding to these waves of +contagious thought. On the other hand, we know equally well how great +waves of religious emotion spread out over the community upon the +occasion of some great 'revival' excitement or religious fervor." + + +Immunity to Thought Influences + +Persons becoming acquainted for the first time with the above recited +facts of mental vibrations, mental currents, mental waves, and mental +contagion, frequently raise the objection that if all this be true, why +are we not constantly swept off of our feet by these great waves of +mental vibrations, whereas, in fact, we are seldom or never aware of +them? The question is a natural one, and is capable of a satisfactory +answer. In the first place, many of these mental currents NEUTRALIZE +each other, and thus both cease to exert any marked effect. And again, +most persons are really "immune" to most of the thought waves reaching +them, this by reason of the protective resistive power bestowed by +Nature, and acquired during the evolution of the race. + +To understand this, we have but to think of our immunity to the great +majority of sounds and sights on the streets of a busy city. On a busy +street corner, we are assailed by an infinitude of sounds and +sights--but we hear but few of these, and see still fewer. The rest of +these impressions are lost to us, although we have ears to hear and eyes +to see. We hear and see only those impressions which are strong enough +to awaken our ATTENTION. In the same way we fail to perceive the +numerous thought vibrations and mental currents constantly surrounding +us, and our attention is attracted and awakened by those sufficiently +strong and vigorous to awaken our attention. The analogy is a very close +one, and the understanding of one set of phenomena gives us the key to +the other. + + +Mental Attunement + +It should not fail to be noticed, moreover, that we habitually receive +and accept more readily those thought vibrations which are in harmony +with our own average habitual mental states; and, according to the same +general principle, we tend to habitually reject and fail to receive +those vibrations which are INHARMONIOUS to us for the same reason. Here, +you will notice, we have an illustration of the principle of +"attunement" which, as we have informed you, is operative on the plane +of thought and mental vibrations as well as on that of wireless +telegraphy. Just as it is a psychological fact that we tend to see and +to hear those things which are in harmony with our beliefs and opinions, +and our interest, so is it a metaphysical fact that we tend to accept +and absorb the mental vibrations which are in harmony with our opinions, +beliefs, and interest, and to reject those which are opposed thereto. + +Moreover, the person who acquaints himself with the law of mental +vibrations and thought-transference acquires a practical knowledge which +enables him to render himself immune to objectionable and undesirable +mental currents or thought-waves. We are not necessarily open to the +influence of every stray current of thought or feeling that happens to +be in our immediate vicinity. Instead, by the proper methods, +consciously or unconsciously practiced and manifested, we may, and often +do, insulate ourselves so that these undesirable mental influences fail +utterly to affect us; and, likewise, we may actually attract to +ourselves the desirable mental currents. These principles and methods +will be given later in this part of this book; they are mentioned here +merely to acquaint you with the fact that they are existent and known to +those familiar with this subject. + + +Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. + +Under the head of Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations may be +placed the following two general classes of phenomena, viz., (1) +Voluntary Efforts to Exert Mental Influence upon Others; and (2) +Voluntary Efforts to Produce the Phenomena of Telepathy, along +Scientific Lines. Each of these general classes of phenomena will now be +presented for your inspection and consideration. + + +Voluntary Mental Influence. + +Under the category of Voluntary Mental Influence we find much of the +phenomena formerly classed as "Magic"--and by this we mean both White +Magic, or efforts to produce results beneficial to the person +influenced, and Black Magic, or efforts to produce results beneficial to +the person exerting the influence, and often to the positive detriment +of the person influenced. + +WHITE MAGIC. Under the category of White Magic may be placed all those +efforts of mental healing, and similar phases of metaphysical +therapeutics; and the accompanying efforts directed toward the general +happiness and welfare of the person "treated." The word "treatment" has +sprung into use in this connection, in America and Europe, by reason of +its employment by the numerous metaphysical cults and schools +flourishing there. We hear on all hands of persons being "treated" for +Health, Happiness, and Prosperity in this way. While in some cases, the +"magic" is worked on higher planes than those of thought-vibrations, it +is nevertheless true that in most instances the entire process is that +of mental induction, along the lines described in the preceding pages +of this book. In such cases the person influenced opens himself to the +helpful thought of the person "treating" him, and thus a co-operation +and mental "team work" is secured, often with the most beneficial +results. This phase of the subject is too well known to require lengthy +consideration in this book, and is more properly the subject of the many +books devoted to this special phase of mental power. + + * * * * * + +BLACK MAGIC. It has well been said that there are always two poles to +everything in Nature, and continued experience and investigation seems +to substantiate this statement. Whenever we find a force or power +producing beneficial results, we may usually feel assured that the same +force or power, turned in another direction, or possibly reversed in its +action, will produce results of an opposite character. And so it is with +this subject of "Magic" which we are now considering. While we would be +very glad to pass over this phase of the subject, truth and duty to our +readers compel us to state that White Magic has its opposite pole--that +opposite pole known as Black Magic, or the use of psychic force for +selfish and unworthy ends. There is no use trying to pursue the ostrich +policy regarding these things--it is always better to face them boldly, +and then to take means to avoid the evil contained in them. + + * * * * * + +We prefer to quote from other writers on this subject, who have given +this particular matter the most careful attention and investigation, and +who have set forth simply and plainly the result of their investigations +and discoveries. Here follow several quotations from authorities of this +kind: + + +Base Use of Mind Power + +One writer says: "It is a fact known to all students of occultism that +Black Magic has been frequently employed in all times to further the +selfish, base ends of some people. And it is also known to advanced +thinkers today that even in this enlightened age there are many who do +not scruple to stoop to the use of this hateful practice in order to +serve their own ends, notwithstanding the punishment that all true +occultists know awaits such persons. The annals of history are full of +records of various forms of witchcraft, conjuration, and similar forms +of Black Magic. All the much talked of practice of 'putting spells' upon +people are really forms of Black Magic, heightened by the fear and +superstition of those affected. One has but to read the history of +witchcraft to see that there was undoubtedly some force at work behind +all of the appalling superstitions and ignorance shown by the people of +those times. What they attributed to the influence of people 'in league +with the devil' really arose from the use of Black Magic, or an unworthy +use of Mental Influence, the two things being one at the last. + + +The Secret of Witchcraft + +"An examination of the methods employed by these 'witches,' as shown by +their confessions, give us a key to the mystery. These 'witches' would +fix their minds upon other people, or their animals, and by holding a +concentrated mental picture there, would send forth thought-waves +affecting the welfare of the persons being 'adversely treated,' which +would influence and disturb them, and often bring on sicknesses. Of +course, the effect of those 'treatments' were greatly heightened by the +extreme fear and superstition held by the masses of people at the time, +for fear is ever a weakening factor in mental influence, and the +superstitions and credulity of the people caused their minds to vibrate +in such a manner as to render them extremely passive to the adverse +influences being directed against them. It is well known that the +Voodoos of Africa, and similar cults among other savage races, practice +Black Magic among their people with great effect. Among the native of +Hawaii there are certain men known as 'Kahunas' who pray people sick, or +well, whichever way they are paid to do. These instances could be +multiplied almost indefinitely, but the basic principle is ever the same +in such cases. + + +Modern Black Magic. + +"In our own civilized lands there are many people who have learned the +principles of mental influence, and who are using the same for unworthy +purposes, seeking to injure others and to defeat their undertakings, or +else trying to bring them around to their own (the treators') point of +view and inclinations. The modern revival of occult knowledge has +operated along two lines, and in opposite directions. On the one hand, +we see and hear of the mighty power for good that mental influence is +exerting over the race today, raising up the sick, strengthening the +weak, putting courage into the despondent, and transforming failures +into successes. But, on the other hand, the hateful selfishness and +greed of unprincipled persons is taking advantage of this mighty force +of nature, and prostituting it to the hateful ends of such persons, +without heed to the dictates of conscience or the teaching of religion +or of ordinary morality. These people are sowing a baleful wind, which +will result in their reaping a frightful whirlwind on the mental plane. +They are bringing down upon themselves pain and misery in the future." + + +The Explanation of Sorcery. + +Another writer says: "In various stages of history we find the records +of persons having been affected by the influences of witches, sorcerers, +and other evil-minded, unprincipled persons. In most cases these +so-called witches and sorcerers themselves were under the delusion that +they were being assisted by the devil or some other supernatural being. +They did not realize that they were simply using natural forces. +Studying the history of witchcraft, sorcery, black magic, and the like, +you will find that the devotees thereof usually employed some +psychometric method. In other cases they would mould little figures of +clay, or of wax, in the general shape and appearance of the person whom +they wished to affect. It was thought that these little figures were +endowed with some supernatural powers or attributes, but of course this +was mere superstition. The whole power of the little figures arose from +the fact that they aided the imagination of the spell-worker in forming +a mental image of the person sought to be influenced; and thus +established a strong mental rapport condition. Added to this, you must +remember that the fear and belief of the public greatly aided the +spell-worker, and increased his power and influence over these poor +persons." + + +The Power of Fearthought. + +The last-named writer explains the reference to "fear and belief" in the +last sentence above quoted by the following very important statements, +and these we ask every student of this book to firmly impress upon his +mind, for a mighty truth is therein conveyed. The statements in question +are as follows: + +"Your attention is hereby called to a very important psychic principle +involved in the manifestation of that class of phenomena in which is +embraced the cases of witchcraft, sorcery, etc., with which the pages of +history are filled. It is a well established fact that by denying the +psychic power over you exerted by any person whatsoever, you practically +neutralize the psychic power of such person, at least so far as its +effect upon and power over yourself is concerned. The stronger and more +positive is your mental attitude of immunity to such power, and your +assertion and affirmation of that immunity, the greater is your own +power of psychic resistance, and the less does his possible power over +you become. The average person, not knowing this, is more or less +passive to psychic influences of other persons, and may be affected by +them to a greater or less extent, the degree depending upon the psychic +development of the person seeking to influence him. + + +The Negative Pole. + +"At the extreme negative pole of susceptibility we find persons who +believe firmly that other persons have psychic power over them, and who +are consequently more or less afraid of such persons and of their +influence. This belief and fear operates in the direction of making such +persons peculiarly sensitive and impressionable to such influence, and +thus easily affected by psychic induction. This is the reason that the +so-called witches and sorcerers and others of evil repute have been +often able to acquire such a power over their victims, and to cause them +so much trouble. The secret is that THE VICTIMS BELIEVED IN THE POWER OF +THE OTHER PERSONS, AND FEARED THEIR POWER. The greater the belief in, +and fear of, the power of the other persons, the greater the +susceptibility to their influence; the greater the disbelief in such +power, and the firm belief in one's own power of immunity and that of +neutralizing the effect of the psychic influence of other persons, the +less is one's degree of susceptibility, and the greater is one's degree +of immunity and power. This is the rule in the case--keep it in mind! + + +Voodooism Explained. + +"Among the negroes of the South, in America, and among the Hawaiians, we +find marked instances of this kind. The negro Voodoo men and women work +Black Magic on those of their race who are superstitious and credulous, +and who have a mortal fear of the Voodoo. Travelers who have visited the +countries in which there is a large negro population have many +interesting tales to recite of the terrible workings of these Voodoo +black magicians. In some cases, sickness and even death is the result. +But, mark you this! It is only those who believe in, and fear, the power +of the Voodoos that are so affected. In Hawaii, the Kahunas or native +magicians are renowned for their power to cause sickness and death to +those who have offended them; or to those who have offended some client +of the Kahuna, and who have hired the latter to 'pray' the enemy to +sickness or death. The poor, ignorant Hawaiians, believing implicitly in +the power of the Kahunas, and being in deadly fear of them, are very +susceptible to their psychic influence, and naturally fall easy victims +to their vile arts, unless they buy off the Kahuna, or make peace with +his client. White persons living in Hawaii are not affected by the +Kahunas, for they do not believe in them, neither do they fear them. +Unconsciously, but yet strongly, they 'deny' the power, and are immune. +So you see the principle working out here, too. Once you have the +master-key, you may unlock many doors of mystery which have heretofore +been closed to you." + + +Self-Protection. + +The following quotations from writers on this special subject contain +detailed directions for the use of those who may have reason to believe +that some other person or persons are trying to use psychic force, or +mental currents, upon them for selfish purposes, or otherwise. Of course +the general mental attitude of disbelief, and assertion of one's one +immunity is sufficient for the purposes of general psychic protection; +but we have thought it proper to include the following special +directions given by those who have made a close study of this subject. + +One writer says: "When you come in contact with people who are seeking +to influence you by psychic methods, either direct or indirect, you will +find yourself able to defy their mental attacks by simply remembering +the strength immanent in your Ego, or Spirit, aided by the statement or +affirmation (made silently to yourself) 'I am an Immortal Spirit, using +the power of my Ego, which renders me immune from all base psychic +attacks or power.' With this mental attitude you may make powerful even +the slightest mental effort in the direction of sending forth your own +mental vibrations, and these will scatter the adverse influences in all +directions; it will often be found that the other person will show signs +of confusion in such a case, and will seek to get away from your +presence. With this consciousness held in mind, your mental command to +another, 'Let me alone--I cast off your influence by the power of my +Spirit,' will operate so strongly that you will often actually see the +effect at once. If the other person be stubborn, and determined to +influence you by words of suggestion, coaxing, threatening, or similar +methods, look him or her straight in the eye, saying mentally: 'I defy +you--my inner power casts off your influence.' Try this the next time +that any one attempts to influence you either verbally or by means of +thought-waves, and see how strong and positive you will feel, and how +the efforts of the other person will fail. This sounds simple, but the +little secret is worth thousands of dollars to every individual who will +put it into practice." + + +Repelling Adverse Influences. + +This writer continues: "Not only in the case of personal influence in +the actual presence of the other person may be defeated in this way, but +the same method will act equally well in the matter of repelling the +mental influence of others directed against you in the form of 'absent +treatments,' etc. If you feel yourself inclining toward doing something +which in your heart you feel is not to your best interests, judged from +a true viewpoint, you may know that, consciously or unconsciously, +someone is seeking in influence you in this way. Then smile to yourself, +and make the statements mentioned above, or some similar one, and +holding the power of the Spirit within your soul, send forth a mental +command just as you would in case the person were actually before you in +person. You may also deny out of existence the influencing power, by +asserting mentally: 'I DENY your power to influence me; you have no such +power over me; I am resting securely upon the Spirit within me; I deny +out of existence any power over me asserted by you.' After repelling +these absent influences you will at once experience a feeling of relief +and strength, and will be able to smile at the thought of any such +adverse influence affecting you in the slightest." + + +Neutralizing Psychic Influences. + +Another writer gives us the following most interesting information and +advice for use in cases of this kind: "I wish to point out to you a +means of protection against the use of psychic influence against +yourself on the part of unscrupulous persons, or any other persons +whomsoever, for that matter. One is fully justified in employing this +method of protection against even the meddling influence of other +persons, who are trying to influence you without your permission or +consent. The following is the method of self-protection or defense +against this class of psychic influence: In the first place, you must, +of course, refuse to admit to your mind any feeling of fear regarding +the influence of other persons, for such fear opens the door to their +influence, as all students of this subject know. If you have been, or +are fearful of the psychic influence of any person, you must get to work +and drive out that feeling by positive and vigorous denials. The DENIAL, +as all students know, is the positive neutralizer of the psychic +influence of another person, providing you make it in full belief in its +truth. You must take the mental position (which is really the true one) +that you are absolutely immune to the psychic attack or influence. You +should say, mentally, 'deny to any person the power to influence me +psychically without my consent; I am positive to all such influences, +and they are negative to me; I neutralize all such influences by this +positive denial!' It should encourage you to know that it requires far +less force and power to repel and neutralize psychic influences of this +kind, than is required to send forth the power; an ounce of denial and +protection overcomes a pound of psychic attacking power. Nature gives +you the means of protection, and gives you the 'best end of the stick'; +and it is your own fault if you do not use it effectively. A word to the +wise is sufficient." + + +Telepathic Phenomena. + +The second general class of phenomena in the general category of +Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations is that known as "Telepathic +Phenomena." In a sense, of course, all phases of Thought Transmission, +and particularly that of Voluntary Thought Transmission, may be +considered as forms of Telepathy; but for the purpose of classification +and distinction we have in this book classed as Telepathic Phenomena +merely those forms and phases of Thought Transference in which there is +an agreement between the telepathic sender and the telepathic receiver, +and in which the experiments are conducted more or less along the lines +of scientific investigation. + + +Scientific Investigators. + +Scientific observers, for a number of years past, have been conducting +careful series of experiments in Telepathy, and many volumes of the +reports of such investigations have been published by various psychic +research societies. Among the eminent scientists who have devoted much +attention to this subject are the following: Professor Henry Sidgewick, +of Cambridge University; Professor Balfour Stewart, of the Royal Society +of England; Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour, the eminent English statesman and +scientist; Professor William James, the eminent American psychologist; +Sir William Crookes, the great English chemist, physicist, who invented +the celebrated "Crookes' Tubes," without which the discovery of the +X-Rays, Radio Activity, etc., would have been impossible; Frederick W. +H. Myers, the celebrated investigator of Psychic Phenomena; and Sir +Oliver Lodge, the eminent English scientist. All these men are of the +highest international standing and reputation, and their acceptance of +the phenomena of Telepathy places the same on a firm scientific basis. + + +How Experiments Are Conducted. + +The scientific experiments involving Telepathy, which have been +conducted by numerous societies for psychical research and other bodies, +have ranged from quite simple tests to those very complex. In all of +these experiments there has been one person called the "sender," and +another called the "receiver"--or names corresponding to these. The +sender fixes in his mind a strong impression of the name or picture to +be transmitted, and then makes a positive effort of the will to transmit +the same to the receiver. The receiver assumes a passive receptive +mental attitude, and then reports the word or image that comes into his +mind. The more complex tests embody these same simple features. + +Some of the early reports of the Society for Psychical Research, of +London, England, show results most amazing to those who have not made a +personal investigation of these matters. In some of the tests, the +receiver correctly reported seventeen cards in succession, the said +cards having been shown the sender, but kept out of sight of the +receiver, and no possible communication between the two being allowed. +In tests of naming small objects held by the sender, the receiver +correctly named five out of six. In one complicated test, in which +various objects, names, etc., were transmitted, the report shows a +successful report of 202 out of a possible 382. Such results, of course, +took the results entirely out of the operation of the law of averages. +Other successful experiments showed a high percentage of results +obtained from the reproduction by the sender of geometrical and other +figures and designs exhibited to the sender. + + +Private Experiments. + +But, after all, the most convincing evidences of Telepathy are those +which most of us have met with in our own experience. There are but few +intelligent, observing persons who have not, at some time in their life, +had experiences of this kind, in which the thoughts of others were +perceived plainly by themselves. Many persons have established such a +close rapport condition between themselves and friends or relatives that +instances of remarkable thought-transmission between them are quite +common and ordinary. + + +Development of Telepathic Power. + +Practically every person may develop a certain degree of telepathic +power, sending, receiving, or both, by means of a moderate amount of +regular and earnest practice and experiments. In developing sending +power, the person should cultivate concentration, and the use of the +will in the direction of projecting mental states; in the case of the +desired development of the receiving power, the person should develop +receptiveness and passivity, and a certain recognition of an actual +telepathic impulse which is impossible to describe in words but which +comes to every investigator, and which when once experienced is always +recognized thereafter. + + +"Mind Reading." + +Perhaps the best plan for the beginner is to practice the popular "mind +reading" experiment or game, which is quite popular in some localities, +and among persons interested in this line of thought. The experiments of +this kind are performed, generally, about as follows: The receiver +leaves the room, and during his or her absence the company in the room +select some object, large or small, such as a chair or a small penknife, +etc., and the same is shown and named to the sender. Then the receiver +is called back into the room for the experiment, and is blindfolded +securely. Then the receiver takes the right hand of the sender and +places it in his (the receiver's) left hand, holding it firmly there. +The sender then concentrates his mind upon the object to be "found," and +mentally wills that the receiver move toward it. The receiver then +experiences a peculiar faint impulse in the direction of the object, and +accordingly moves toward it. After considerable practice, the receiver +acquires the faculty of not only finding large objects, but also is able +to locate small objects, such as concealed rings, pins, etc. + + +Development Practices. + +This class of experiments, while open to the objection that there may be +more or less muscular direction consciously or unconsciously given by +the sender, nevertheless tend to develop proficiency in both sender and +receiver. In fact, such experiments are perhaps one of the very best +methods of developing projecting or receiving power along the lines of +occult or psychic forces. This because the persons become familiar with +the psychic processes involved, and their efficiency becomes increased +by practice and experiment. This plan is like that of teaching a child +how to walk by means of holding its hand, allowing it to rest on chairs, +etc. In practicing such experiments, the receiver will soon become +conscious of receiving the thought message in what may be called a +"wireless flash," instead of by the slower, and less clear process of +transmission through the physical body of the sender, and thence through +his own nerves. When the sender begins to experience these flashes of +consciousness, he is ready to proceed to the next stage. + + +The "Willing Game." + +The second stage on telepathic development is much akin to that just +described, with the difference that there is no physical contact between +the sender and the receiver--no holding of hands, etc. A variation of +this is found in the familiar "willing game" in which the whole roomful +of persons concentrates upon the receiver, and "wills" that he find a +selected object. On the whole, however, the private experiments +conducted by the sender and the receiver, with perhaps a few intelligent +and sympathetic spectators, are far better than the "willing game" plan, +in which there are usually many triflers present ready to make a joke of +the whole thing, and thus taking away that true concentration under +which the best results may be obtained. + + +Formal Tests. + +The third step in telepathic development is that of conducting +experiments similar to those originally conducted by the Society for +Psychical Research, previously mentioned. That is to say, the sender may +select cards from a pack, coins from a pile, small objects from a +collection, etc., and then endeavor to transmit the impression of the +same to the receiver--the latter then reporting his flashes of +impression received. This may be rendered more complicated by having the +sender in one place, and the receiver at another, the time having +previously been agreed upon between them. In experiments conducted at +long range, it has been generally found better for the receiver to write +down the word, thought, or mental, picture which has been transmitted to +him by the sender; and for the sender to write down the name or picture +of the thing the idea of which he has transmitted. These memoranda serve +not only as scientific proof of the experiment, but also serve as a +barometer of progress being made during the experiments. + + +Automatic Writing. + +In this connection it may be stated that many investigators and +experimentors along the lines of telepathic phenomena have met with +considerable success in the direction of Automatic Writing from living +persons, which of course is merely a special form of Telepathy. In some +cases the communications received in this way were at first thought to +be from disembodied entities, until later it was discovered that the +thoughts were actually transmitted (in some cases unintentionally) by +living persons. The late W. T. Stead, the London editor and famous +investigator of psychic phenomena, who was lost on the "Titanic" several +years ago, was remarkably successful along this special line of +telepathic transmission, he being one of the most efficient receivers of +this kind of which those familiar with the subject have any knowledge. +His written records of these experiments are very interesting, and form +a valuable contribution to this subject. In this class of experiments, +the sender concentrates fixedly upon the thought--word for word--and +wills that the recipient write down the word so transmitted; the +receiver sit passively at the time agreed upon, and allows his arm and +hand to be moved by means of the psychic currents beating upon him, and +which are then unconsciously transformed into muscular action--the +process being similar to that of ordinary writing, except that instead +of the activity of the brain of the writer being behind the muscular +motion, that of the sender performs that task. + + +Psychic Sensitiveness. + +The student of this book will find in the succeeding portions thereof, +from time to time, certain general instructions regarding the +cultivation of psychic receptivity and sensitiveness. These general +instructions are also applicable to the cultivation of telepathic power, +and may be properly applied to that end. There is really but one general +principle involved in all the many forms of psychic receptivity, namely +that of (1) shutting the senses to the ordinary impressions of the +outside world, and (2) opening the higher channels of sense to the +impressions coming in the form of vibrations of the higher forces and +finer powers of Nature. At the last, it is simply a matter of "getting +in tune," just as truly as in the case of the wireless telegraphy. These +things are difficult to explain in ordinary words to one who has had no +experience along these lines; but when one begins to actually experiment +and practice, the way opens out gradually and steadily, and then the +person can grasp the meaning of the little "hints" dropped by others who +have traveled the same path. So, after all, it comes down to the matter +of Practice, Experiment, and Learning by Trying! + + + + +PART IV + +CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA + + +A very large and very interesting class of occult or psychic phenomena +is that known under the very general classification of "Clairvoyance," +which term we have thought it advisable to employ in this sense in this +book, notwithstanding the technical objections urged by some against +such a general usage. The term "Clairvoyance" really means "clear +seeing," or "clear sight," but its special meaning, established by long +usage, is "A power of discerning objects not perceptible to the normal +senses." When it comes to the technical use of the term by students and +teachers of psychic research and occultism, however, there is found a +confused meaning of the term, some employing it in one sense, and others +in another one. Accordingly, it is perhaps as well to explain the +particular usage adopted and followed in this book. + + +Clairvoyance Defined. + +The English Society for Psychical Research, in its glossary, defines the +term as follows: "The faculty or act of perceiving, as though visually, +with some coincidental truth, some distant scene; it is used sometimes, +but hardly properly, for transcendental vision, or the perception of +beings regarded as on another plane of existence." A distinguished +investigator along psychic lines, in one of her reports to the English +Society for Psychical Research, has given the following definition of +this term as employed by her in her reports, viz., "The word +'clairvoyant' is often used very loosely, and with widely different +meanings. I denote by it a faculty of acquiring supernormally, BUT NOT +BY READING THE MINDS OF PERSONS PRESENT, a knowledge of facts such as we +normally acquire by the use of our senses. I do not limit it to +knowledge that would normally be acquired by the sense of sight, nor do +I limit it to a knowledge of present facts. A similar knowledge of the +past, and if necessary, of future events, may be included. On the other +hand, I exclude the mere faculty of seeing apparitions, which is +sometimes called clairvoyance." + +The last stated definition agrees almost perfectly with the views of the +writer of the present book, and the term "Clairvoyance" is used here in +the particular sense indicated by such definition. The student of this +book, therefore, is asked to distinguish Clairvoyance, on the one hand, +from the phenomena of Telepathy or Thought Transference, and, on the +other hand, from the phenomena of communication with entities on other +planes of existence, including the perception of apparitions. + + +The Phenomena of Clairvoyance. + +The phenomena of Clairvoyance may be subdivided (a) according to methods +employed, and also (b) according to general distinctions. The said +classifications follow: + +CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO METHODS. The classification of Clairvoyant +Phenomena according to methods employed, proceeds as follows: (1) +PSYCHOMETRY, in which the clairvoyant becomes en rapport through the +medium of some physical object connected with the person or scene which +is the object of the en rapport connection; (2) CRYSTAL GAZING, etc., in +which the en rapport connection is established by means of a crystal, +magic mirror, etc., into which the clairvoyant gazes; (3) DIRECT +CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the clairvoyant directly establishes the en +rapport connection by means of raising his or her psychic vibrations so +as to become "in tune" with the finer vibrations of Nature, without the +aid of physical objects. + + +Classification According to General Distinctions. + +The classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena according to general +distinctions, proceeds as follows: (1) PRESENT CLAIRVOYANCE, in which +the objects perceived by the clairvoyant are present in Space and Time, +although invisible to normal sight; (2) SPACE CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the +clairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space from the +immediate normal perception of the clairvoyant; (3) TIME CLAIRVOYANCE, +in which the clairvoyant perceives objects or scenes removed from him in +past time, or future time. + +In order that the student may obtain a comprehensive understanding of +the phenomena of Clairvoyance, we have thought it well to give you a +brief, general outline of the particular phenomena fitting into these +several classes, and to give you, also, a general idea of the principal +methods employed to obtain the phenomenal manifestations in question. +We begin by calling your attention to the three general classes of +method employed to obtain the manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena, +namely: Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, and Clairvoyant Psychic States, +respectively. + + +Psychometry. + +In Psychometry, the clairvoyant establishes the en rapport connection +with objects, persons or scenes, removed in space or in time, by means +of some physical object associated with the distant object, person or +scene; for instance, the physical objects may be a piece of clothing, a +bit of stone, a coin, a bit of jewelry, etc., which has been closely +associated with that which the clairvoyant desires to sense psychically. +The distinctive feature of this class of clairvoyant phenomena is this +CONNECTING LINK of physical objects. A writer has cleverly compared this +connecting link with the bit of clothing which the keen-scented +bloodhound is given to sniff in order that he may then discover by scent +the person sought, the latter having previously worn the bit of clothing +presented to the dog's sense of smell. + + +The "Psychic Scent." + +Occultists have elaborated a technical theory to account for the +phenomena of Psychometry, or rather to account for the action of the +"connecting link" of the physical object employed to establish the +connection between clairvoyant and distant object, person, or scene. But +we do not think it advisable to enter into a discussion of these +elaborate, technical theories, which are apt to confuse the beginner, +and to distract his attention from the important facts of the case. We +think it is sufficient to say that the "connecting link," or physical +object, seems to carry along with it, in its inner substance or nature, +the vibrations of its past environment; and that the clairvoyant, coming +into receptive contact with such vibrations, is enabled with comparative +ease to follow up the psychic "scent" until he establishes clairvoyant +en rapport connection with the distant object, person, or scene +associated with the physical object. When it is remembered that the +physical "scent" of anything is merely a matter of the detection of +certain vibrations, the illustration is seen to be not so very far out +of the way after all. + + +Magnetic Affinity. + +A somewhat celebrated investigator of psychic and occult phenomena has +said concerning this phases of Clairvoyance: "The untrained clairvoyant +usually cannot find any particular astral picture when it is wanted, +without some special link to put him en rapport with the subject +required. Psychometry is an instance in point. It seems as though there +were a sort of magnetic attachment or affinity between any particle of +matter and the record which contains its history--an affinity which +enables it to act as a kind of conductor between that record and the +faculties of anyone who can read it. For instance, I once brought from +Stonehenge a tiny fragment of stone, not larger than a pin's head, and +on putting this into an envelope and handing it to a psychometrist who +had no idea what it was, she at once began to describe that wonderful +ruin and the desolate country surrounding it, and then went on to +picture vividly what were evidently scenes from its early history, +showing that the infinitesimal fragment had been sufficient to put her +into communication with the records connected with the spot from which +it came. The scenes through which we pass in the course of our life seem +to act in the same way upon the cells of our brain as did the history of +Stonehenge upon that particle of stone. They establish a connection with +those cells by means of which our mind is put en rapport with that +particular portion of the records, and so we 'remember' what we have +seen." + + +Distant En Rapport. + +One of the most familiar instances of the production of clairvoyant +phenomena by means of Psychometry is that illustrated in the above +quotation, namely the production of the en rapport relation with distant +scenes by means of the connecting link of some small object which had at +some time in the past been located at that point. In such cases the +psychometrist usually presses the small object up to his or her head, +and then induces a passive, receptive psychical condition; then, sooner +or later, the clairvoyant experiences a "sensation," or a "dream +picture" of the scene in question. Often, once the picture of the scene +is obtained, the clairvoyant may manifest more marked past-time +clairvoyance, in the direction of running back over the history of the +scene itself. The instance related in the above quotation is a case of +this kind. Similar cases are frequently met with by the investigator +along these lines, in which the clairvoyant is able to give the history +of certain places in ancient Egypt, from the connecting link of a piece +of mummy-cloth; or else to give a picture of certain events in +antediluvian times, from the connecting link of a bit of fossil +substance. The history of Psychometry is filled with remarkable +instances of this kind. Bullets gathered from battlefields also serve +very effectively as such psychometric connecting links. Old furniture, +old pictures, and old jewelry also are common objects serving to produce +wonderful phenomena of this kind. In fact, any physical object having +past-time or far-distant space connections may be employed effectively +in such experiments. + + +Psychic Underground Exploration. + +Psychometry is frequently employed to describe underground or "mine" +conditions existing at the present time at the particular place from +which a particular piece of ore or mineral has been taken, which ore or +mineral has been handed the psychometrist to be used as the connecting +link. As many practical miners know from actual experience, many +valuable coal, zinc, lead, silver and gold mines have been successfully +located in this way. In such cases the psychometrist has been able to +follow up the psychic "scent" given by the piece of mineral, and thus to +describe the strata or veins of the mineral lying underground and +unopened by the pick or drill. + + +Psychic Detective Work. + +Many cases are recorded by the investigators in which the psychometrist +is able to "sense" a particular locality, a house, a room, a place of +business, for instance, by means of the connecting link afforded by some +physical object formerly associated with the said location. Some writers +have called this class of psychometric phenomena "psychic spying" or +"psychic detective work." One writer records a case in which he gave to +a young psychometrist a penholder from the office of a lawyer, the +latter being located about eight hundred miles away; the psychometrist +then gave a perfect picture of the interior of the far-distant lawyer's +office, the scene across the street visible from the office window, and +certain events which were happening in the office and on the street at +that particular time--all of which report was verified in detail by +subsequent careful inquiry. + + +How to Psychometrize. + +The following general remarks concerning Psychometry, given by a writer +on the subject, will be found interesting and instructive. The writer +says: "There are no special directions to be given the student in +psychometry. All that can be done is to suggest that each person should +try the experiments for himself, in order to find out whether he has, or +has not the psychometric power in some degree of development. He may be +able to develop his psychometric powers by the general methods given for +psychic development; but, in any event, he will find that actual +practice and experiment will do much for him in the direction of +experiment. Let the student take strange objects, and, sitting in a +quiet room with the object held to his forehead, endeavor to shut out +all thoughts coming from the outside world, and forget all his personal +affairs. In a short time, if the conditions be right, he will begin to +have flashes of scenes associated with the history of the object in +question. At first these impressions may be somewhat disconnected and +more or less confused, but before long there will be noticed a clearing +away of the scene, and the mental picture will become quite plain. +Practice will develop the power. The student should practice only when +alone or when in the presence of some sympathetic friend or friends. He +should always avoid discordant and inharmonious company while practicing +his psychic power. Many of the best psychometrists keep their physical +eyes closed when practicing this power, thus allowing the inner senses +to function without distraction from the outer senses. + + +Developing Psychometry. + +"You have doubtless heard of the sensing of sealed letters spoken of as +pure clairvoyance. But this phase of phenomena properly belongs to the +realm of Psychometry. Letters frequently prove to be very excellent +connecting links in psychometric experiments. I advise the student to +begin with old letters. He will be surprised to discover how readily he +will begin to receive psychic impressions from the letters--either from +the person who wrote them, or from the place in which they were written, +or from some one connected with their subsequent history. One of the +most interesting experiments I ever witnessed in Psychometry was that in +which a letter that had been forwarded from place to place, until it had +gone completely around the globe, was psychometrized by a young Hindu +maid. Although ignorant of the outside world of foreign lands, the young +women was able to picture the people and scenery of every part of the +globe in which the letter had traveled. Her report was really an +interesting 'travelogue' of a trip around the world, given in tabloid +form. The student may obtain some interesting results in +psychometrizing old letters--but let him always be conscientious about +it, and be careful to refrain from divulging the secrets that will +become his during the course of these experiments. Let him be honorable +on the psychic plane as well as on the physical plane--more so, rather +than less so, in fact." + + +Varieties of Psychometry. + +Another investigator along these lines gives the following instructive +comments regarding the practice of psychometric power: "Persons of a +highly-strung nervous organization, with large perceptive faculties make +the best psychometrists. Phlegmatic people seldom psychometrize clearly, +and usually lack receptivity to the finer forces. Letters, clothes, +hair, coins, ornaments, or jewels--in fact, almost any article which has +belonged to, or has been worn by, its possessor for any length of time, +will suffice to enable the psychometrist to relate himself to, and +glimpse impressions of, the personal sphere of that individual. Some +psychometrists succeed better with certain kinds of objects than with +others. Metals and minerals are not good 'conductors'--if we may use +that term--to some operators; while they are very satisfactory to +others. In the same way, some psychometrists are very good character +readers, others are very successful in the diagnosis of diseases; some +can read the book of Nature, while to others it is a sealed book, or +nearly so, but they are able to gauge the mental qualifications of their +visitors, while others realize their moral and spiritual states. Again, +some read the Past, and enter into the Present states or condition of +their clients, while others are successful in exercising prophetical +prevision. These differences may be modified, and the boundaries of the +perceptive power may be extended by self-study, experiment, and culture; +but every psychic has his qualifications and his limitations; one will +succeed where another may fail; hence it is well and wise for each one +to discover what he can do best, what sphere he can best occupy, and +then endeavor to fill it. + + +Psychometric "Getting in Touch." + +"A psychometrist may, by holding a letter in his hand, or putting it to +his forehead, be able to perceive and delineate the personal appearance +of the writer thereof, and, in a way, to 'take on' his conditions, +describe his feelings and thoughts to such an extent as to identify +himself with him and to feel, for the time being, as if he, himself, +were the writer; he may even tell what is written in the letter, +although unable to see the writing. Human hair is found by some +psychometrists to give them the best means of coming into touch with +their subjects, and it is said that such hair should be cut from the +head just behind the ears, as close to the scalp as possible. It not +infrequently happens that a psychometrist gets started upon a false +trail, so to speak, and especially so when the inquirer is suspicious, +or where there is a mixture of psychic influences. A fan passed by a +lady to a sitter in the front row at a meeting, and held in the hands of +the latter for a few minutes while awaiting a chance to be handed to the +psychic, has resulted in a blending of vibratory influences which has +caused an imperfect or confused 'reading.' In one case the gentleman who +held the fan said 'I fully recognize the part of the description which +the lady does not admit--it applies to myself quite perfectly.' Hence +the necessity for care in providing articles for psychometrists in a +public meeting. A ring, for instance, which has been in the family for +generations, and handed from one wearer to another in the course of +years, may afford such a blending of psychic vibrations that the +psychometrist may be unable to sense distinctly each distinct stratum of +influence therein. + + +Psychometric Readings. + +"The person who sits for the psychometrist for a 'reading' should not be +antagonistic nor frivolous, neither should he desire special +information, nor concentrate his thought forces upon any given point, as +otherwise he may dominate the psychic and thus mislead him into +perceiving only a reflex of his own hopes or fears. He will do well to +preserve an open mind, and an impartial though sympathetic mental +attitude, and then await results. It is unwise to interrupt, explain, or +question during the time that a delineation is being given, for by so +doing the psychic sphere is disturbed and the thought projections caused +to act like the breezes upon the surface of a lake, producing confused +and distorted appearances. It is best to allow the descriptions to be +given in its entirety before asking questions regarding any of its +details; it is quite possible or probable that the very points upon +which inquiries seem necessary will be more fully elucidated before the +close of the reading. If a special reading, and not a general one is +required--say, for instance, a diagnosis of diseased conditions--a hint +of what is desired at the outset should be sufficient." + + +Crystal Gazing, Etc. + +The second of the three general classes of the methods employed to +obtain the manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena is that known as +Crystal Gazing. In this class of methods the clairvoyant establishes the +en rapport condition by means of a crystal, magic mirror, or similar +object, which serves principally to concentrate the psychic visual +powers to a focus, and thus to enable the psychic to raise his or her +psychic vibrations at that concentrated focused point. + + +Crystals and Bright Objects. + +The use of crystals and other bright objects for this purpose has been +common to occultists and psychics at all times, past and present, and at +all places, oriental or occidental. The earlier races employed shining +pieces of quartz or other clear crystal rock for this purpose. Later +polished metals were used in the same way. The native soothsayers of +barbaric lands employ clear water, glowing embers, or sparks, for this +purpose. In some places the soothsayers hold drops of blood in the +hollow of their hands for divining purposes. Others bore a hole in the +ground, and fill it with water, and then gaze into it. Some tribes use +dark polished stones. A writer on the subject has said: "They stare into +a crystal ball, a cup, a mirror, a blot of ink, a drop of blood, a bowl +of water, a pond, water in a glass bowl, or almost any polished surface, +etc." In fact, it may be said that almost every object capable of +presenting a polished surface has been employed by some race as an aid +to psychic vision. In Europe and America, at the present day, quartz or +glass crystals are so used; but others obtain quite satisfactory +results from the use of watch crystals laid over a black cloth, +preferably a piece of black velvet cloth. Others use highly polished +bits of silver; while others content themselves with the use of a little +pool of black ink lying on the bottom of a small saucer, while others +have cups painted black on the inside, into which is poured water. + + +The Care of the Crystal. + +There is no particular virtue in any particular object used for this +purpose, as such object acts merely to focus the psychic power of the +person, as has been said. Certainly the student should not fall into the +error of supposing that the crystal, or similar object, has any +miraculous or supernatural power whatsoever, it is simply an instrument, +like the microscope or telescope, nothing more or less. But, at the same +time, it must be admitted that there is much truth in the claim of +certain crystal gazers, to the effect that the use of a particular +crystal seems to have the effect of polarizing its molecules so as to +render it a more effective instrument in time. In fact, the phenomenon +seems to bear a close relation to the well known case of a long-used +violin becoming a more perfect instrument, and giving forth richer and +fuller notes than a new instrument. The longer a gazing crystal is used, +especially by the one person, the better does it seem to serve the +purposes of that particular person. Experts in crystal gazing insist +that the crystal gazer should keep his own crystal for his own +particular use, and not allow it to be used indiscriminately, +particularly in the case of strangers or of persons not sympathetic with +psychic subjects. They claim that each crystal becomes polarized +according to the individual character and needs of the person habitually +using it, and that it is unwise to allow others to disturb this quality +in it. + + +How to Use the Crystal. + +The best authorities on the subject of crystal-gazing insist that all +experiments along the said lines should be conducted in a serious, +earnest manner, and that all frivolity or trifling should be avoided if +the best results are wished for. This, of course, is true concerning all +phases of psychic investigation, as all true students of the subject +know. All the authorities agree that the crystal gazer should sit with +the light behind his back, and never in front of him. While an earnest +steady gaze is desirable, there should be no straining of the eyes. As +one writer has said: "Gaze calmly at the crystal, but do not strain your +eyes. Do not try to avoid winking your eyes--there is a difference +between 'gazing' and 'staring,' remember." Some authorities advise that +the crystal gazer should make funnels of his hands, using them as he +would a pair of opera-glasses. + + +The "Milky Mist." + +While some experimenters obtain results almost from the time of the +first trial, others find that it requires a number of sittings before +they begin to obtain even faint results. The psychic picture in the +crystal usually begins by the appearance of a cloudy "milky mist," +succeeding the former transparent appearance of the crystal. The milky +cloud becomes more dense, and finally there appears in its midst a +faint form, outline, face, or scene of some kind. Some have compared +this gradual emergence of the picture to the gradual development of the +picture of the photographic plate when the latter is subjected to the +action of the developing fluid. + + +Classes of Psychic Pictures. + +An English writer on the subject furnishes the following general +classification of the psychic pictures manifested in the process of +crystal gazing. The said authority might well have added that each and +every form of clairvoyant picturing is possible in crystal gazing; for +crystal gazing is merely one particular form or method of inducing +clairvoyant or psychic vision, and is not a distinct branch of psychic +phenomena in itself. The classification of the English authority, +however, is as follows: + +"1. Images of something unconsciously observed. New reproductions, +voluntary or spontaneous, and bringing no fresh knowledge to the mind. + +"2. Images of ideas unconsciously acquired from others. Some memory or +imaginative effort which does not come from the gazer's ordinary self. +Revivals of memory. Illustrations of thought. + +"3. Images, clairvoyant or prophetic. Pictures giving information as to +something past, present, or future, which the gazer has no other chance +of knowing." + + +General Directions for Crystal Gazing. + +An old English authority on the subject of crystal gazing handed down to +his students a certain set of general directions and rules to govern the +conduct of their experiments. These rules and directions have never +been improved upon by the later writers on the subject, according to the +opinion of the best authorities; and such stand today as perhaps the +simplest and best set of general rules and directions on this important +subject. For this reason we have thought it advisable to include the +same in this chapter, for the guidance of our own students. Here follow +the said general rules and directions: + +"What is desired through the regular use of the translucent sphere is to +cultivate a personal degree of clairvoyant power, so that visions of +things or events, past, present, and future, may appear clearly in the +interior vision, or eye of the soul. In the pursuit of this effort only, +the crystal becomes at once a beautiful, interesting and harmless +channel of pleasure and instruction, shorn of dangers, and rendered +conducive to mental development. To the attainment of this desirable +end, attention is asked to the following practical directions, which, if +carefully followed, will lead to success: + + +Selection of Place, Etc. + +"(1) Select a quiet room where you will be entirely undisturbed, taking +care that it is as far as possible free from mirrors, ornaments, +pictures, glaring colors, and the like, which may otherwise distract the +attention. The room should be of comfortable temperature, in accordance +with the time of year, neither hot nor cold. About 60 to 65 degrees +Fahr. is suitable in most cases, though allowance can be made where +necessary for natural differences in the temperaments of various +persons. Thus thin, nervous, delicately organized individuals, and those +of lymphatic and soft, easy-going, passive types, require a slightly +warmer apartment than the more positive class who are known by their +dark eyes, hair and complexion, combined with prominent joints. Should a +fire, or any form of artificial light be necessary, it should be +screened off, so as to prevent the light rays from being reflected in, +or in any other manner directly reaching the crystal. The room should +not be dark, but rather shadowed, or charged with a dull light, somewhat +such as prevails on a cloudy or wet day. + + +Adjusting the Crystal. + +"(2) The crystal should be placed on its stand on a table, or it may +rest on a black velvet cushion, but in either case it should be +partially surrounded by a black silk or similar wrap or screen, so +adjusted as to cut off any undesirable reflection. Before beginning to +experiment, remember that most frequently nothing will be seen on the +first occasion, and possibly not for several sittings; though some +sitters, if strongly gifted with psychic powers in a state of +unconsciousness, and sometimes conscious degree of unfoldment, may be +fortunate enough to obtain good results at the first trial. If, +therefore, nothing is perceived during the first few attempts, do not +despair or become impatient, or imagine that you will never see +anything. There is a royal road to crystal vision, but it is open only +to the combined password of Calmness, Patience, and Perseverance. If at +the first attempt to ride a bicycle, failure ensues, the only way to +learn is to pay attention to the necessary rules, and to persevere daily +until the ability to ride comes naturally. Thus it is with the would-be +seer. Persevere in accordance with these simple directions, and success +will sooner or later crown your efforts. + + +Time of Sittings. + +"(3) Commence by sitting comfortably with the eyes fixed upon the +crystal, not by a fixed stare, but with a steady, calm gaze, for ten +minutes only, on the first occasion. In taking the time it is best to +hang your watch at a distance, where, while the face is clearly visible, +the ticking is rendered inaudible. When the time is up, carefully put +the crystal away in its case, and keep it in a dark place, under lock +and key, allowing no one but yourself to handle it. At the second +sitting, which should be at the same place, in the same position, and at +the same time, you may increase the length of the effort to fifteen +minutes, and continue this period during the next five or six sittings, +after which the time may be gradually increased, but should in no case +exceed one hour. The precise order of repetition is always to be +followed until the experimenter has developed an almost automatic +ability to readily obtain results, when it need no longer be adhered to. + + +Other Persons Present. + +"(4) Any person, or persons, admitted to the room, and allowed to remain +while you sit, should (a) keep absolute silence, and (b) remain seated +at a distance from you. When you have developed your latent powers, +questions may, of course, be put to you by one of those present, but +even then in a very gentle, or low and slow tone of voice; never +suddenly, or in a forceful manner. + + +Crystalline Vision. + +"(5) When you find the crystals begin to look dull or cloudy, with small +pin-points of light glittering therein, like tiny stars, you may know +that you are commencing to obtain that for which you seek, viz., +crystalline vision. Therefore, persevere with confidence. This condition +may, or may not, continue for several sittings, the crystal seeming at +times to alternatively appear and disappear, as in a mist. By and by +this hazy appearance, in its turn, will give way quite suddenly to a +blindness of the senses to all else but a blue or bluish ocean of space, +against which, as if it were a background, the vision will be clearly +apparent. + + +Physical Requirements. + +"(6) The crystal should not be used soon after taking a meal, and care +should be taken in matters of diet to partake only of digestible foods, +and to avoid alcoholic beverages. Plain and nourishing food, and outdoor +exercise, with contentment of mind, or love of simplicity of living, are +great aids to success. Mental anxiety, or ill-health, are not conducive +to the desired end. Attention to correct breathing is of importance. + + +Determining Time of Fulfillment. + +"(7) As regards the time at which events seen will come to pass, each +seer is usually impressed with regard thereto; but, as a general rule, +visions appearing in the extreme background indicate time more remote, +either past or future, than those perceived nearer at hand; while those +appearing in the foreground, or closer to the seer, denote the present +or immediate future. + + +Two Classes of Visions. + +"(8) Two principal classes of vision will present themselves to the +sitter, viz.: (a) the Symbolic, indicated by the appearance of symbols +such as a flag, boat, knife, gold, etc., and (b) Actual Scenes and +Personages, in action or otherwise. Persons of a positive type of +organization, the more active, excitable, yet decided type, are most +likely to perceive symbolically, or allegorically; while those of a +passive nature usually receive direct or literal revelations. Both +classes will find it necessary to carefully cultivate truthfulness, +unselfishness, gratitude for what is shown, and absolute confidence in +the love, wisdom, and guidance of God Himself." + + +Time and Space in Crystal Gazing. + +In the subsequent pages the student will perceive the different +manifestations of clairvoyant vision classified according to the +distinction of Time and Space. Clairvoyant vision may disclose objects, +scenes, or persons either near by in space, or far off in space; either +existing in present time, in past time, or in future time. Inasmuch as +the visions of crystal gazing are merely particular forms of clairvoyant +vision, it follows that all of the several above named distinctive forms +of vision are manifested in crystal gazing. The vision shown in the +crystal may be that of something very near in space, or perhaps very far +off in space, or removed in space only a moderate distance. Likewise +such vision may be based upon things existing at the present time, or at +some period of past time, or at some period of and visions of past, +present, or future things, events, persons, scenes--each or all of these +manifestations are possible to the clairvoyant vision of the crystal +gazer, and pictured in the reflecting surface of the crystal or other +shining surface employed by him in his experiments. + + +Direct Clairvoyance. + +The third of the three general classes of the methods employed to obtain +the manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena is that known as Direct +Clairvoyance. In this class of methods the clairvoyant directly +establishes the en rapport connection with the past or present, near or +distant, objects, persons, scenes, or events, by means of raising his or +her psychic vibrations so as to become "in tune" with the finer +vibrations of Nature, without the aid of the physical objects required +in the methods of Psychometry and Crystal Gazing, respectively. + + +Trance Conditions. + +Many clairvoyants, manifesting their powers by means of the methods of +Direct Clairvoyance, produce in themselves the condition of trance, or +semi-trance condition. Many students believe that these conditions are +absolutely necessary for the production of this kind of phenomena, but +they neglect, or are actually unaware of, the fact that many of the +highest forms of this class of clairvoyant phenomena are manifested by +clairvoyants who are no more in a trance condition, or that of +semi-trance, than those following the methods of Psychometry or Crystal +Gazing, respectively. All that is required is that the clairvoyant +maintain a quiescent mental attitude, shutting out the sounds, sights, +and thoughts of the outside world, and concentrating the full attention +upon the clairvoyant work before him or her. Some, it is true, pass +easily into the semi-trance, or even the full trance condition, but the +latter are not absolutely necessary states. + + +Clairvoyant Reverie. + +A writer on the subject of Clairvoyance says: "The best authorities +instruct their pupils that the state of clairvoyant reverie may be +safely and effectively induced by the practice of mental concentration +alone. They advise positively against artificial methods. All that is +needed is that the consciousness be focused to a single point--become +'one pointed' as the Hindu teachers call it. The intelligent practice of +concentration accomplishes this without the necessity of any artificial +methods of development, or the production of abnormal psychic states. +You easily concentrate your full attention when you witness an +interesting play, or listen to a beautiful rendition of some great +masterpiece of musical composition, or gaze at some miracle of pictured +or sculptured art. In these cases your attention is completely occupied +with the interesting thing before you, so that you have almost +completely shut out the outer world of sound, sight, and thought--but +you are, nevertheless, perfectly wide awake and conscious. The same +thing is true when you read a very interesting book--the world is shut +out from your consciousness, and you are oblivious to the sights and +sounds around you. We frequently witness the sight of two lovers to whom +the outside world is non-existent for the time being, and to whom there +is nothing in the world except themselves. Again, persons often fall +into a 'brown study,' or 'day dream,' in which all consciousness of the +outside world seems to be shut out, yet the person is fully conscious +and wide awake. These mental states are very much akin to that of the +trained clairvoyant, and is the state which should be sought after by +all clairvoyants, whether they are following the methods of Psychometry, +Crystal Gazing, or that of Direct Clairvoyance--for the principle is one +and the same in all of such methods." + + +The Dawn of Clairvoyance. + +A well-known authority on the subject of Psychic Development says: +"Occasional flashes of clairvoyance sometimes comes to the highly +cultured and spiritual-minded man, even though he may never have heard +of the possibility of training such a faculty. In his case such glimpses +usually signify that he is approaching that stage in his evolution when +these powers will naturally begin to manifest themselves. Their +appearance should serve as an additional stimulus to him to strive to +maintain that high standard of moral purity and mental balance without +which clairvoyance is a curse and not a blessing to its possessor. +Between those who are entirely unimpressionable and those who are in +full possession of clairvoyant power, there are many intermediate +stages. Students often ask how this clairvoyant faculty will first be +manifested in themselves--how they may know when they have reached the +stage at which its first faint foreshadowings are beginning to be +visible. Cases differ so widely that it is impossible to give to this +question any answer that will be universally applicable. Some people +begin by a plunge, as it were, and under some unusual stimulus become +able just for once to see some striking vision; and very often in such a +case, because the experience does not repeat itself, the seer comes in +time to believe that on that occasion he must have been the victim of +hallucination. Others begin by becoming intermittently conscious of the +brilliant colors and vibrations of the human aura; yet others find +themselves with increasing frequency seeing and hearing something to +which those around them are blind and deaf; others, again, see faces, +landscapes, or colored clouds floating before their eyes in the dark, +before they sink to rest; while perhaps the commonest experience of all +is that of those who begin to recollect with greater and greater +clearness what they have seen and heard on other planes during sleep." + + +Methods of Development. + +The same authority, after warning students against attempting to develop +their psychic powers by unnatural and harmful practices, such as +self-hypnotism, self-stupefication, etc., gives the following excellent +advice concerning the normal development of clairvoyant and other high +psychic powers and faculties: "There is one practice which if adopted +carefully and reverently can do no harm to any human being, yet from +which a very pure type of clairvoyance has sometimes been developed--and +that is the practice of Meditation. Let a man choose a certain time +every day--a time when he can rely upon being quiet and undisturbed, +though preferably in the daytime rather than at night--and set himself +at that time to keep his mind for a few minutes entirely free from all +earthly thoughts of any kind whatsoever; and, when that is achieved, to +direct the whole force of his being towards the highest ideal he happens +to know. He will find that to gain perfect control of thought is +enormously more difficult than he supposes, but when he attains it this +cannot but be in every way more beneficial to him, and as he grows more +and more able to elevate and concentrate his thoughts, he may gradually +find that new worlds are opening before his sight. As a preliminary +training towards the satisfactory achievement of such meditation, he +will find it desirable to make a practice of concentration in the +affairs of daily life--even in the smallest of them. If he writes a +letter, let him think of nothing else but that letter until it is +finished; if he reads a book, let him see to it that his thought is +never allowed to wander away from his author's meaning. He must learn to +hold his mind in check, and to be master of that also, as well as of his +lower passions; he must patiently labor to acquire absolute control of +his thoughts, so that he will always know exactly what he is thinking +about, and why--so that he can use his mind, and turn it or hold it +still, as a practiced swordsman turns his weapon where he will." + + + + +PART V + +CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE + + +As we have said in the preceding chapter, in our consideration of the +general subject of Clairvoyance, there is possible a general +classification of clairvoyant phenomena according to general +distinctions, as follows: (1) PRESENT CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the objects +perceived by the clairvoyant are present in time and in space, although +invisible to normal sight; (2) SPACE CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the +clairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space from the +normal perception of the clairvoyant; and (3) TIME CLAIRVOYANCE, in +which the clairvoyant perceives objects or scenes removed from him in +past time, or future time. + +While the general methods of manifesting these various forms of +clairvoyant power are practically the same, yet the nature of these +several forms of phenomena vary considerably, as we shall see when we +come to consider them in detail in the following pages: this is +particularly true in the case of the distinction between past-time +clairvoyant phenomena, and future-time clairvoyant phenomena--the +difference between the perception of what has been, and that which has +not yet been. + + +Present Clairvoyance. + +In what is called Present Clairvoyance the objects perceived by the +clairvoyant are present in time and in space, at the moment and place of +the perception, although invisible to normal sight. It is seen at once +that if the object seen clairvoyantly is present in time and in space to +the clairvoyant, and yet is incapable of being perceived by the normal +sight of the clairvoyant, then that object must be capable of being +perceived only through vibrations above the normal range of the human +senses. Perhaps the precise nature of this class of clairvoyant +perceptions will be better understood by a more detailed description of +the objects actually perceived by clairvoyant vision of this mode of +manifestation. + + +The Human Aura. + +In the first place, this mode of clairvoyant vision discloses the +interesting phenomena concerned with the human aura, or psychic +atmosphere which surrounds the human body for a space of several feet, +assuming an egg-shaped form. A writer says on this point: "The trained +clairvoyant vision sees the human aura as a nebulous hazy substance, +like a luminous cloud, surrounding the person for two or three feet on +each side of his body, becoming more dense near the body, and gradually +becoming less dense as it extends away from the body. It has a +phosphorescent appearance, with a peculiar tremulous motion manifesting +through its substance. The clairvoyant sees the human aura as composed +of all the colors of the spectrum, the combination shifting with the +changing mental and emotional states of the person. But, in a general +way, it may be said that each person has his or her distinctive astral +auric colors, depending upon his or her general character or +personality. Each mental state, or emotional manifestation, has its own +particular shade or combination of shades of auric coloring. This +beautiful kaleidoscopic spectacle has its own meaning to the occultist +with clairvoyant vision, for he is thus able to read the character and +general mental states of the person by means of studying his auric +colors. The human aura is not in a state of calm phosphorescence, +however. On the contrary, it sometimes manifests great flames, like +those of a fiery furnace, which shoot forth great tongues, and dart +forth suddenly in certain directions toward the objects attracting them. +Under great emotional excitement the auric flames move around in swift +circling whirlpools, or else swirl away from a centre. Again, it seems +to throw forth tiny glistening sparks of psychic vibrations, some of +which travel for a great distance. + + +The Prana Aura. + +"The clairvoyant vision is also able to discern what is called the +'prana aura' of a person. By this term is indicated that peculiar +emanation of vital force which surrounds the physical body of each and +every person. In fact, many persons of but slight clairvoyant power, who +cannot sense the auric colors, are able to perceive this prana aura +without trouble. It is sometimes called the 'health aura,' or 'physical +aura.' It is colorless, or rather about the shade of clear glass, +diamond, or water. It is streaked with very minute, bristle-like lines. +In a state of good health these fine lines are stiff like toothbrush +bristles; while in the case of poor health these lines droop, curl, and +present a furlike appearance. It is sometimes filled with minute +sparkling particles, like tiny vibratory motion. To the clairvoyant +vision the prana aura appears like the vibrating heated air arising from +a fire, or stove, or from the heated earth in summertime. If the student +will close his eyes partially, and peer through narrowed eyelids, he +will in all probability be able to perceive this prana aura surrounding +the body of some healthy, vigorous person--particularly if that person +be standing in a dim light. Looking closely, he will see the peculiar +vibratory motion, like heated air, at a distance of about two inches +from the body of the person. It requires a little practice in order to +acquire the knack of perceiving these vibrations--a little experimenting +in order to get just the right light on the person--but practice will +bring success, and you will be repaid for your trouble. In the same way, +the student may by practice acquire the faculty of perceiving his own +prana aura. The simplest way to obtain this last mentioned result is to +place your fingers (spread out into fan-shape) against a black +background, in a dim light. Then gaze at the fingers through narrowed +eyelids, and half-closed eyes. After a little practice, you will see a +fine thin line surrounding your fingers on all sides--a semi-luminous +border of prana aura. In most cases this border of aura is colorless, +but sometimes a very pale yellowish hue is perceived. The stronger the +vital force of the person, the stronger and brighter will this border of +prana aura appear. The aura surrounding the fingers will appear very +much like the semi-luminous radiance surrounding a gas-flame, or the +flame of a candle, which is familiar to everyone." + + +The Auric Colors. + +Another writer says of the clairvoyant perception of the human aura: "As +he looks, the clairvoyant will see himself surrounded by the luminous +mist of the aura, flashing with all sorts of brilliant colors, and +constantly changing hue and brilliancy with every variation of the +person's thought and feelings. He will see this aura flooded with the +beautiful rose-color of pure affection, the rich blue of devotional +feeling, the hard, dull brown of selfishness, the deep scarlet of anger, +the horrible lurid red of sensuality, the livid grey of fear, the black +clouds of hatred and malice, or any of the other hundredfold indications +so easily to be read in it by the practiced eye; and thus it will be +impossible for any persons to conceal from his the real state of their +feelings on any subject. Not only does the astral aura show him the +temporary result of the emotion passing through it at the moment, but it +also gives him, by an arrangement and proportion of its colors when in a +condition of perfect rest, a clue to the general disposition and +character of its owner." + + +Thought Forms. + +Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this class is that of the +perception of "thought forms," as they are called by occultists. As all +students of occultism know, a strong thought or emotion manifests a +certain high vibratory motion, and takes upon itself a vibratory "form" +which is plainly perceptible to the trained clairvoyant vision. These +thought-forms manifest a great variety in appearance and character. Some +appear in a faint wave-like form, something like the tiny waves caused +by the dropping of a pebble in a pond of water. Others take on a +whirlpool form, rotating and whirling as they move through space. Others +appear like whirling rings, similar in general form to the "ring" puffed +forth from the mouth of a cigar smoker, or from the funnel of a +locomotive. Others glow like great opals. Others appear like jets +emitted from the spout of a teakettle. Others twist along like a +corkscrew. Others appear like exploding bombs. Others branch out arms +like a devil-fish, which wriggle in all directions, as if striving to +attach themselves to some object upon which they wish to take hold. + + +The X-Ray Sense. + +Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this general class is that +which may be called "the X-Ray Sense," for indeed it enables the +clairvoyant to see through a brick wall, or other material obstacle, or +through a sealed letter, etc. The higher psychic vibrations easily pass +through the most solid object, just as do the X-Rays, and consequently +the clairvoyant is able to see what is going on on the other side of a +brick wall, or the walls of a house. Likewise, the clairvoyant vision is +able to pierce through the dense earth, and to perceive veins of mineral +or metal lying concealed beneath. + + +Microscopic Vision. + +Another phase of clairvoyant power of this general class, but one not +nearly so common as those above mentioned, is described by a well-known +occultist as follows: "Another strange power of which the clairvoyant +may find himself in possession is that of magnifying at will the +minutest physical particle to any desired size, as through a +microscope--though no microscope ever made, or ever likely to be made, +possesses even a thousandth part of this psychic magnifying power. By +its means the hypothetical molecule and atom postulated by science +becomes visible and living realities to the occult student, and on this +closer examination he finds them to be much more complex in their +structure than the scientific man has yet realized them to be. It also +enables him to follow with the closest attention and the most lively +interest all kinds of electrical, magnetic, and other etheric action; +and when some of the specialists in these branches of science are able +to develop the power to see these things whereof they speak so facilely, +some very wonderful and beautiful revelations may be expected." + + +Space Clairvoyance. + +In what is called Space Clairvoyance the objects, persons, scenes, or +events perceived by the clairvoyant are removed in space from him--often +being located at points in space thousands of miles distant, in fact. +The pages of works upon occultism, and those devoted to the recording of +proved instances gathered by the societies for psychical research, are +filled with the most interesting cases of this form of clairvoyant +vision. Instances are recorded, upon the very best possible authority, +in which persons with clairvoyant powers have been perfectly cognizant +of events occurring on the other side of the world, or across the +Atlantic or Pacific Oceans. In fact, it would seem that distance and +space are practically wiped out in this form of clairvoyant phenomena, +and that it is just as easy to see clairvoyantly over the space of a +thousand miles, as over that of a hundred feet--the principle involved +being precisely the same. + + +The Psychic Telescope. + +Space Clairvoyance, or Distant Clairvoyance, is manifested in the form +of Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, or Direct Clairvoyance, as we have said. +We do not consider it necessary to record here any typical instances of +this phase of phenomena, as the many books on this subject are chiefly +devoted to a recital thereof, and every student is more or less +acquainted with the same. The whole matter may be summed up by saying +that in this form of clairvoyant vision, there is manifested what might +be called a "psychic telescope with an X-Ray attachment," thus enabling +one to see at any distance, and through any intervening objects. This +gives you a mental picture of the process. + + +Radio-Activity. + +In the theory of vibratory forces, as set forth in the earlier chapters +of this book, we have the only scientific explanation of the phenomena +of distant clairvoyance. Modern science, in its teachings regarding the +radio-activity of physical objects, has thrown much additional light on +this subject, and has corroborated the ancient occult teachings on the +subject. These rays of higher vibratory power are like the rays of light +or heat, although of a much higher rate of intensity and vibratory +motion, and though the most delicate scientific instruments are able to +register some of these, it is still practically admitted by science that +the highest of these radio-active vibrations are beyond the scope and +field of even the most sensitive instrument yet known to science. This +is saying much when we remember that some of the delicate instruments of +science are so sensitive that they are able to register the heat waves +of a candle at the distance of one mile; while others are able to record +the presence of certain chemical elements in the most distant of the +visible stars, by means of the light waves carrying certain forms of +vibration. + + +Sensing the Higher Vibrations. + +Under the radio-active theory it is quite reasonable to conceive of the +clairvoyant sense being able to register and interpreting these higher +vibrations which are beyond the power of even the most delicate +instruments of science. It must be admitted that the existence of such +vibrations being granted--and science tacitly admits their +presence--then ordinary distances on earth would be no barrier at all to +the action of clairvoyant vision capable of registering them. Moreover, +in such case all intervening objects would be penetrated by these waves, +and as a writer has well said, "they would be able to cross one another +to infinity in all directions without entanglement, precisely as the +vibrations of ordinary light do." Physical science and psychic science +at last seem to have arrived at a common ground of understanding, and +many of the most advanced scientists do not hesitate to admit this +fact, though their more conservative brethren hesitate to do so. + + +Viewing Distant Scenes. + +A writer has said of this form of clairvoyant perception: "The view of a +distant scene obtained in this way is in many ways not unlike that seen +through a telescope. Human figures usually appear very small, like those +upon a distant stage, but in spite of their diminutive size they are +clear as though they were close by. Sometimes it is possible by this +means to hear what is said as well as to see what is done; but as in the +majority of cases this does not happen, we must consider it rather as +the manifestation of an additional power than as a necessary corollary +of the faculty of sight. It will be observed that in cases of this kind +the clairvoyant does not actually leave his physical body at all--he +simply manufactures for himself, and uses, a kind of psychic telescope. +Consequently he has the use of his physical powers while he is examining +the distant scene; for example, his voice usually describes what he sees +even while he is in the act of making the observation." + + +Time Clairvoyance. + +In what is called Time Clairvoyance the clairvoyant is able to perceive +objects, persons, scenes, and events removed from him in past time or +future time. That is to say, the clairvoyant perceives things which have +existed in the physical world in times long past, which things have long +since vanished from physical existence; or, on the other hand, he +perceives things which belong to future existence--this which have +never as yet been in physical existence, and of course are not in such +existence at the present time. The careful student will see at once that +the principle of manifestation governing these two respective phases of +clairvoyance must be quite different; and, accordingly, the two +respective phases must be considered separately and apart from each +other. + + +Past Time Clairvoyance. + +In what is known as Past Time Clairvoyance there is the manifestation of +clairvoyant vision in the direction of scenes and occurrences of the +past. Here, the clairvoyant perceives the events and scenes of past time +just as clearly and plainly as if such were present before him in time +and in space. Just as in Distant Clairvoyance it is just as easy for the +clairvoyant to see things at a great distance as those at a short +distance, so in Past Time Clairvoyance it is just as easy for the +clairvoyant to see things and events occurring five thousand years ago +as it is to see things occurring one year ago, or one week ago for that +matter. The principle involved is the same in either case. + + +The Mystery of Seeing the Past. + +To persons investigating the phenomena of clairvoyance for the first +time, however, there seems to be a much greater mystery attached to the +phenomena of Past Clairvoyance than in the case of Distant Clairvoyance. +To such persons it seems that while the perception of distant objects, +scenes, and events is wonderful and mysterious, still at the last it is +merely the perception of something now actually in existence--merely +the extension of one's normal powers of vision so as to include objects +beyond the range of the ordinary vision, but, still, actually in +existence though at a distance. The idea of the telescope enables the +mind to grasp the naturalness of this kind of phenomena. But when it +comes to the perception of things, scenes, and events WHICH ARE NO +LONGER IN EXISTENCE--things which have passed entirely out of +existence--the mystery seems to be increased, and incredulity becomes +more insistent. But to the occultist there is really no more mystery in +the one case than in the other--both sets of phenomena are seen to be +perfectly reasonable and within the realms of Nature. Let us now see how +and why the occultists view the matter in this light. + + +Analogies on the Physical Plane. + +We may find many correspondences on the physical plane to serve as +illustrations of the phenomena of Past Time Clairvoyance, if we will but +look for them. For instance, when we withdraw a heated stove from a +room, the heat remains in the room. Likewise, though a woman bearing the +odor of a certain perfume on her clothing may have passed from a house, +the odor still lingers there. The wake of an ocean steamer is often +visible for hours after the ship has passed from sight. As modern +science expressed it: "Causes continue to exist in their Effects." + + +Thousand-Year-Old Light. + +But we have a much more striking illustration and correspondence in the +case of the transmission of light from the distant stars, which we will +do well to carefully consider. Light travels at the rate of 186,000 +miles per second. A "light-year," as known to astronomers, means the +distance traversed by a light wave (at the stated rate of travel) during +the period of one of our earth years. Some of the distant stars are +estimated to be fully one thousand light-years distant from us; or, in +other words, the light we now perceive as coming from them really is the +light that left them one thousand years ago. If one of these stars were +to be destroyed, observers on this earth would not become aware of it +for a thousand years. The star whose light we may now perceive may +actually have been destroyed nearly one thousand years ago. Other stars +are only one hundred light-years removed from us in space; others only a +few years; others only a few hours. But the principle is just the same +in all cases, namely, that we see the stars not as they are at the +present moment, but as they were when the light left them, perhaps many +years ago. Thus, as you see, we may actually perceive events long after +their happening. + + +Reading the Light Waves. + +Now, if our physical vision was sufficiently powerful to magnify objects +on the stars, or if we had instruments to do this for us, we could +actually witness scenes, objects, persons and events which had passed +out of existence a thousand years ago. Their records are present in +these light waves from the stars, and all that is needed is an eye or a +telescope sufficiently strong to register them upon our mind. In a +fanciful story written by Camille Flammarion, the French astronomer, +many years ago, the principal character relates how, traveling in the +astral body, he was able to witness the events of the French Revolution +which had occurred many years before, by simply proceeding to the +necessary distance from the earth and there perceiving the registered +records in the earth's light-waves traveling through space at the rate +of 186,000 miles a second. In fact, by getting at the right distance he +was able to see even the events of his own childhood and youth, every +event of his life, in fact, up to the moment of his leaving the earth. +This story, fanciful as it is, nevertheless is based upon scientific +facts, and its happenings would be quite possible for a being capable of +traveling at a sufficiently rapid rate through space, and also possessed +of the power of magnifying the records of light rays. In fact, a person +on earth possessing the power of Distant Clairvoyance might be able to +duplicate these feats, providing he were able to come in rapport contact +with one of these light-waves bearing the past-time records. Think for a +moment, and you will grasp the point of this statement. + + +The Akashic Plane. + +But this, however, is but an illustration of the correspondence on the +ordinary physical plane of certain things on a higher plane of Nature. +Past Time Clairvoyance is not dependent upon light-waves, or any other +of the lesser phases of vibratory activity. Instead, it depends entirely +upon the phenomena and facts of a higher plane of Nature--a plane which +occultists have called the Akashic Plane. Some occultists prefer the +general term, "the Astral Plane," but the former term is a closer and +more definite one. The Akashic Plane, as known to occultists, contains +the impressions or "records" of all events that have happened on the +earth plane during the present cycle of earth manifestation. The very +subtle and tenuous substance of the Akashic Plane--the term "etheric" +may best describe the nature of this substance--contains traces and +impressions of all the happenings of the past of this earth; and such +impressions may be read and seen by the clairvoyant who has developed +sufficiently high powers of vision. These Akashic Records have well been +called "the substantial memory of the earth." Upon the subtle etheric +substance of the Akashic Plane are registered the records of every +event, thing, object, happening, or activity of the earth which has +existed or been manifested from the very beginning of the present cycle +of the earth's existence. These records will, it is claimed, persist +until the final ending of the present earth cycle. + + +The Akashic Records. + +The clairvoyant whose powers of Past Time Clairvoyance have been +developed sufficiently, and who has mastered the art of concentration of +his psychic attention, manages to come into more or less perfect en +rapport condition contact with these Akashic Records, and is thus +enabled to read from them what he sees there. To him it actually seems +as if he were seeing the actions of things in present existence, and +many excellent clairvoyants are ignorant of the existence of the Akashic +Records, though they habitually read the contents thereof; these +clairvoyants know simply that they "see" these past happenings--they +have not the faintest conception of how they are able to see them. This +is no more strange than would be the case of a man who witnessed a +moving picture for the first time, and who was ignorant of the mechanism +involved in the showing of the picture, the existence of the film, +etc.,--such a man would simply know that he "saw" the things, and he +might even believe that he was gazing upon an actual scene in real life. + + +Degrees of Clairvoyant Vision. + +There is, of course, many degrees of power and development among +clairvoyants of this class; and as a result we have many varying degrees +of correctness in their readings. Some have merely a glimpse, as through +dim glasses; and some obtain merely distorted reflections similar to +those of a scene reflected into the troubled waters of a lake. Others +see far more clearly; but it is reserved for the trained occultist to +read the records as he would read the scene before him on the physical +plane. The clairvoyant does not become infallible simply by reason of +the perhaps only faint awakening of his clairvoyant vision--he is not +suddenly gifted with omniscience, as some seem to suppose. There are +almost always elements of error or imperfect visioning, except among the +advanced adepts of the occult world. + + +"The Memory of Nature." + +A celebrated occultist says concerning the point just raised: +"Comparatively few accounts of persons possessing this faculty of +looking into the past are to be found in the literature of the subject, +and it might therefore be supposed to be much less common than +prevision, or future-time clairvoyance. I suspect, however, that the +truth is rather that it is much less commonly recognized. It may easily +happen that a person may see a picture of the past without recognizing +it as such, unless there happens to be in it something which attracts +special attention, such as a figure in armor, or in antique costume. It +is probable that occasional glimpses of these reflections of the Akashic +Records are commoner than the published accounts would lead us to +believe. As usual, we find examples of all degrees of the power to see +into this 'memory of Nature,' from the trained man who can consult the +record for himself at will, down to the person who gets nothing but +occasional vague glimpses, or has even perhaps had only one such +glimpse. But even the man who possesses this faculty only partially and +occasionally may still find it of the deepest interest. + + +Involuntary Clairvoyance. + +"The psychometrist, who needs an object physically connected with the +past in order to bring it all into life again around him; and the +crystal-gazer who can sometimes direct his less certain astral telescope +to some historic scene of long ago, may both derive the greatest +enjoyment from the exercise of their respective gifts, even though they +may not always understand exactly how their results are produced, and +may not have them fully under control under all circumstances. In many +cases of the lower manifestation of these powers we find that they are +exercised unconsciously; many a crystal-gazer watches scenes from the +past without ever realizing that he is in effect psychometrizing the +various objects around him as he happens to touch them or stand near +them. It would be well for all students to bear in mind that occultism +is the apotheosis of common sense, and that every vision that comes to +them is not necessarily a picture from the Akashic Records, nor every +experience a revelation from on high. It is far better to err on the +side of healthy scepticism than that of over-credulity; and it is an +admirable rule never to hunt for an occult explanation of anything when +a plain and obvious physical one is available. Our duty is to keep our +balance always, and never to lose our self-control, but to take a +reasonable, common-sense view of whatever may happen to us." + + +Future Time Clairvoyance. + +In what is known technically as Future Time Clairvoyance, we have the +manifestation of the clairvoyant vision in the direction of scenes and +events of the future. In this phase of clairvoyance the seer perceives +the events and scenes of future time just as if they were present before +him at that very moment. This phase of clairvoyance is far rarer and +more uncommon than any of the other phases. In fact, it is so seldom met +with in its perfection that its manifestation is a matter of greatest +interest to those who make a study of the subject. It occasionally +occurs in flashes, and can not be produced at will by the ordinary +clairvoyant. Unfortunately, its very rarity and uncommonness cause it to +be counterfeited and imitated by unprincipled persons. + + +Seeing What Has Not Yet Happened. + +The student who reasons carefully and logically usually meets with what +to him, at least at first, seems to be an unsurmountable obstacle in +the way of a rational explanation of Future Time Clairvoyance--when it +comes to an understanding of how anyone can expect to see, or can really +see, THAT WHICH HAS NEVER HAPPENED, he throws up his hands in despair. +But, in this as in all the other phases of clairvoyant phenomena, there +is found a reason and cause, although it requires some subtle thinking +to find it, and to grasp it even when it is found. Let us see what are +the highest teachings on this subject, as announced by the careful +thinkers along the lines for many centuries. + + +Simple Prevision. + +There is a phase of prevision, or prophecy of coming events, however, +that is not true clairvoyance at all, but simply the subconscious +workings of the mind along the lines of a supernormal perception of the +laws of cause and effect. Give the active subconscious mental faculties +the perception of a strong existing cause, and it will often reason out +the probable effect (the almost certain effect, in fact) of that cause, +even though that effect lies in the mist of the future. The subconscious +mind works upon the principle that "coming events cast their shadows +before." But this, at the best, is not true clairvoyance--it is merely +the statement of "probable" results, and effects of existing causes, +wonderfully exact and clear though the deduction may be in some cases. +But a thousand-and-one unforeseen things may arise to completely upset +the prediction, or deduction, for it is never actually true until it +occurs. We must look further for real instances of Future Clairvoyance. + + +The Nature of Time. + +That eminent scientist, Sir Oliver Lodge, offers an ingenious and +interesting, though very technical explanation of this class of +clairvoyant phenomena as follows: "Time is but a relative mode of +regarding things; we progress through phenomena at a certain definite +pace, and this subjective advance we interpret in an objective manner, +as if events moved necessarily in this order and at this precise rate. +But that may be only one mode of regarding them. The events may be in +some sort of existence always, both past and future, and it may be we +who are arriving at them, not they which are happening. The analogy of a +traveler in a railway train is useful; if he could never leave the +train, nor alter its pace, he would probably consider the landscapes as +necessarily successive, and be unable to conceive their co-existence. We +perceive, therefore, a possible fourth dimensional aspect about time, +the inexorableness of whose flow may be a natural part of our present +limitations. And if we once grasp the idea that past and future may be +actually existing, we can recognize that they may have a controlling +influence on all present action, and the two together may constitute the +'higher plane' or totality of things after which, it seems to me, we are +impelled to seek, in connection with the directing of form or +determinism, and the action of human beings consciously directed to a +definite and preconceived end." + + +The Oriental Teaching. + +The Hindus, and other oriental peoples, however, have a clearly defined +and positive explanation of the phenomena of Future Time Clairvoyance, +which must be included in our consideration of the subject, even though +it does involve certain metaphysical or philosophical conceptions which +are apart from our present inquiry as conducted in this book. The +oriental theory is based upon that basic conception of the eastern +philosophies which hold that the beginning, duration, and ending of any +particular one of the infinitude of successive universes created by the +Supreme Being, is to that Being but as a single moment of time; or, as +the celebrated Hindu proverb runs: "The creation, duration, and +destruction of a universe is but the time of the twinkling of an eye to +Brahman." In other words, that to the Supreme Being, all the past, all +the present, all the future of the universe, must be as but a single +thought in a single moment of time--an instantaneous act of +consciousness. + + +The Eternal Now. + +A writer on this subject has said: "Those occultists and metaphysicians +who have thought long and deeply upon the ultimate facts and nature of +the universe, have dared to think that there must exist some absolute +consciousness--some absolute mind--which must perceive the past, +present, and future of the universe as one happening; as simultaneously +and actively present at one moment of absolute time. They reason that +just as a man may see at one moment of his time some particular event +which might appear as a year to some minute form of life and mind--the +microscopic creatures in a drop of water, for instance--so that which +seems as a year, or as a hundred years, to the mind of man, may appear +as the happening of a single moment of a higher scale of time to some +exalted Being, or form of consciousness on a higher plane." + + +Absolute Time + +The daring flights of metaphysical fancy have resulted in the general +acceptance, on the part of advanced metaphysicians, of the postulate of +the existence of an Absolute Mind, independent of Time and Space, to +which everything exists HERE and NOW. To such a mind the entire sequence +of events in the life-history of a universe would appear as a single +unit of conscious experience--an infinitesimal point of time in +Eternity. The human imagination staggers at the idea, but logical +thought finally posits it as an unescapable conclusion of extended +thought. This, possibly, is the secret of Future Time Clairvoyance, +Prevision, Second Sight, etc. + + +The Occult Hypothesis. + +But it must not be supposed that the oriental occultists hold for a +moment the theory that the clairvoyant actually obtains access to the +Divine Mind or Absolute Mind, when he experiences this vision of future +events--their idea is very different from this. These occultists teach +that the phenomena of each plane are reflected with more or less +clearness upon the substance of the planes beneath it. This being so, it +is readily seen that the seer who is able to contact with any of the +higher planes of being might thereupon see the reflection, more or less +clear, or more or less distorted, of that which is present in its +completeness on the highest plane of all. This is a mere hint at the +quite complicated occult teaching on this subject; but the capable +thinker will be able to work out the full theory for himself in his own +way. The important fact is that Future Time Clairvoyance is a +reality--that it is a matter of actual experience of the race, and one +that has been authenticated by the investigations of such learned bodies +as the Society for Psychical Research, of England, and other societies +of the same kind in different lands. Future Time Clairvoyance, Second +Sight, Prevision, etc., are facts as fully accepted by such societies as +are the facts of telepathy. + + +"The Prophecy of Cazotte." + +Students of history are familiar with the numerous recorded instances of +marvelous prophecy of future events, wonderful predictions of events to +come, which have been fully corroborated and verified by subsequent +events. We lack the space in this book to record more than one of the +most celebrated of these historical prophecies, namely the Prophecy of +Cazotte. We have thought it advisable to reproduce the story of this +celebrated prophecy, as told by La Harpe, the French writer, who was +present upon the occasion. It may be mentioned that the fact of this +prophecy, and its literal fulfilment, is a part of French history. The +time was just previous to the French Revolution, and the tale as told by +La Harpe is as follows: + + +The Dinner of the Elect. + +"It appears as but yesterday, and yet, nevertheless, it was at the +beginning of the year 1788. We were dining with one of the brethren at +the Academy--a man of considerable wealth and genius. The conversation +became serious; much admiration was expressed on the revolution of +thought which Voltaire had effected, and it was agreed that it was his +first claim to the reputation he enjoyed. We concluded that the +revolution must soon be consummated; that it was indispensable that +superstition and fanaticism should give way to philosophy, and we began +to calculate the probability of the period when this should be, and +which of the present company should live to see it. The oldest +complained that they could hardly flatter themselves with the hope; the +younger rejoiced that they might entertain this very probable +expectation; and they congratulated the Academy especially for having +prepared this great work, and for having been the rallying point, the +centre, and the prime mover of the liberty of thought. + + +The Illuminatus. + +"One only of the guests had not taken part in all the joyousness of this +conversation, and had even gently and cheerfully checked our splendid +enthusiasm. This was Cazotte, an amiable and original man, but unhappily +infatuated with the reveries of the Illuminati. He spoke, and with the +most serious tone, saying: 'Gentlemen, be satisfied; you will all see +this great and sublime revolution, which you so much desire. You know +that I am a little inclined to prophecy; I repeat, you will see it.' He +was answered by the common rejoinder: 'One need not be a conjurer to see +that.' He answered: 'Be it so; but perhaps one must be a little more +than conjurer for what remains for me to tell you. Do you know what +will be the consequences of this revolution--what will be the +consequences to all of you, and what will be the immediate result--the +well-established effect--the thoroughly recognized consequences to all +of you who are here present?' + + +The Beginning of the Prophecy. + +"'Ah,' said Condorcet, with his insolent and half-suppressed smile, 'let +us hear--a philosopher is not sorry to encounter a prophet--let us +hear?' Cazotte replied: 'You, Monsieur de Condorcet--you will yield up +your last breath on the floor of a dungeon; you will die from poison, +which you will have taken in order to escape from execution--from poison +which the happiness of that time will oblige you to carry around your +person. You, Monsieur de Chamfort, you will open your veins with +twenty-two cuts of a razor, and yet will not die till some months +afterward.' These personages looked at each other, and laughed again. +Cazotte continued: 'You, Monsieur Vicq d'Azir, you will not open your +own veins, but you will cause yourself to be bled six times in one day, +during the paroxysm of the gout, in order to make more sure of your end, +and you will die in the night.' + + +The Shadow of the Guillotine. + +"Cazotte went on: 'You, Monsieur de Nicolai, you will die on the +scaffold; you, Monsieur Bailly, on the scaffold; you, Monsieur de +Malesherbes, on the scaffold.' 'Ah, God be thanked,' exclaimed Roucherm, +'and what of I?' Cazotte replied: 'You! you also will die on the +scaffold.' 'Yes,' replied Chamfort, 'but when will all this happen?' +Cazotte answered: 'Six years will not pass over, before all that I have +said to you shall be accomplished.' Here I (La Harpe) spoke, saying: +'Here are some astonishing miracles, but you have not included me in +your list.' Cazotte answered me, saying: 'But you will be there, as an +equally extraordinary miracle; you will then be a Christian!' Vehement +exclamations on all sides followed this startling assertion. 'Ah!' said +Chamfort, 'I am comforted; for if we perish only when La Harpe shall be +a Christian, we are immortal!' + + +The Fall of the Great. + +"'Then,' observed Madame la Duchesse de Grammont, 'as for that, we +women, we are happy to be counted for nothing in this revolution; when I +say for nothing, it is not that we do not always mix ourselves up with +them a little; but it is a received maxim that they take no notice of +us, and of our sex.' 'Your sex, ladies,' said Cazotte, 'your sex will +not protect you this time; and you had far better meddle with nothing, +for you will be treated entirely as men, without any difference +whatever.' 'But what, then, are you really telling us of, Monsieur +Cazotte? You are preaching to us the end of the world.' 'I know nothing +on that subject; but what I do know is, that you, Madame la Duchesse, +will be conducted to the scaffold, you and many other ladies with you, +in the cart of the executioner, and with your hands tied behind your +backs.' 'All! I hope that in that case I shall at least have a carriage +hung in black.' 'No, Madame; higher ladies than yourself will go, like +you, in the common car, with their hands tied behind them.' 'Higher +ladies! what! the princesses of the blood?' 'Yea, and still more exalted +personages!' replied Cazotte. + + +The Fate of Royalty. + +"Here a sensible emotion pervaded the whole company, and the countenance +of the host was dark and lowering--they began to feel that the joke was +becoming too serious. Madame de Grammont, in order to dissipate the +cloud, took no notice of the last reply, and contented herself with +saying in a careless tone: 'You see, he will not leave me even a +confessor!' 'No, madame!' replied Cazotte, 'you will not have +one--neither you, nor any one besides. The last victim to whom this +favor will be afforded will be--' Here he stopped for a moment. 'Well, +who then will be the happy mortal to whom this prerogative will be +given?' Cazotte replied: 'It is the only one which he will have then +retained--and that will be the King of France!' This last startling +prediction caused the company to disband in something like terror and +dismay, for the mere mention of such things was akin to treason." + + +The Fulfillment of the Prophecy. + +To appreciate the startling nature of the Cazotte prophecy at the time +when it was made, one needs but to be even slightly acquainted with the +position and characteristics of the persons whose destinies were thus +foretold. The amazing sequel to this wonderful prophecy is told by +history--within six years every detail thereof was verified absolutely. +The facts are known to all students of French history of that period, +and may be verified by reference to the pages of any comprehensive +history of those times. + + +Other Historical Instances. + +To mention but a few other celebrated instances of historic prophecy: +George Fox, the pioneer Quaker Friend, had the clairvoyant faculty well +developed, and numerous instances of its manifestation by him are +recorded. For instance, he foretold the death of Cromwell, when he met +him riding at Hampton Court; he said that he felt "a waft of death" +around and about Cromwell--and Cromwell died shortly afterward. Fox also +publicly foretold the dissolution of the Rump Parliament of England; the +restoration of Charles II; and the Great Fire of London. These +prophecies are all matters of history. For that matter, history contains +many instances of this kind, as, for instance, the prophecy of Caesar's +death, and its further prevision by his wife. The Bible prophecies and +predictions, major and minor, give us semi-historical instances. + + +The Eternal Verities. + +As a writer has said concerning this phase of clairvoyant phenomena: +"This phase of clairvoyance is very fascinating to the student and the +investigator, and is one in which the highest psychic powers are called +into play. There is a reflection here of something even higher than the +psychic plane--there is a glimpse of regions infinitely higher and +greater. The student here begins to realize at least something of the +existence of that universal Consciousness 'in which we live, and move, +and have our being'; and of the existence of the reality of the Eternal +Now, in which past, present, and future are blended as one fact of +infinite consciousness. He sees here the signboard pointing to the +eternal verities!" + + + + +PART VI + +MEDIUMSHIP + + +Among the higher categories of Nature's Finer Forces is included that +which is popularly known as "mediumship." Although this term has +suffered more or less by reason of its misappropriation by certain +charlatans and the unprincipled exploiters of sincere investigators of +the phenomena of the higher planes of existence, and also by reason of a +certain prejudice against the term arising from misrepresentation and +general misunderstanding, the term still remains a perfectly legitimate +one and one clearly indicating the nature of the general class of +phenomena sought to be embraced within its limits. Therefore there is no +valid reason for its rejection in our consideration of the subject of +Nature's Finer Forces in this book; and, accordingly, it is used here in +a general way, although the more scientific term "higher plane +communication," or similar terms, are employed herein in some cases. + + +What Is Mediumship? + +Let us see just what is meant by the term "mediumship." The term +"medium" is defined as: "That which lies in the middle, or between other +things: hence, that through which anything is conveyed from one thing +to another." In a special sense, a "medium" is "a person serving as the +channel of communication between decarnate entities and human being +still in the flesh," in "spiritualistic phenomena." The suffix "ship," +of course, denotes state or office; and in the case of "mediumship" it +indicates that the designated person possesses the state or office of a +"medium," the latter term being used in the special meaning above +defined. + +Of course, the term "mediumship," as above defined, lacks a clear +meaning unless the term "spiritualistic," or "spiritualism" be defined. +The term "spiritualism" (or as many of the best authorities prefer to +state it, "spiritism") is applied to "a system of communication with the +unseen world, or with the inhabitants thereof, the latter being usually +known as 'spirits,' through persons called 'mediums,' which has attained +popular favor in Europe and America since about 1850." Or, as another +authority states it, "Spiritualism is a term employed to indicate the +belief that departed spirits hold intercourse with mortals by means of +psychical phenomena, commonly through a person of special susceptibility +called a 'medium.'" + + +Ancient Mediumship. + +It is, of course, unnecessary to state in detail the fact that +communication with decarnate entities has been known and practiced by +the human race from the earliest days of recorded history, and +probably long before that time, and is far from being a modern +discovery. Moreover, such communication has been known and practiced +by races of human beings other than those inhabiting Europe and +America--particularly in the oriental countries. In the oriental lands +such communication has been well established for many thousand years, +and the most ancient records give evidences of it. The Hebrew +Scriptures contain many instances of such communication, showing that +the same was an accepted fact of the life of the race at the time and +in the places at which these records were written. + + +Mediumship and Religious Belief. + +The careful student will of course notice that this communication with +the higher planes of life and being--this so-called "mediumship"--does +not depend upon any particular form of religious belief, or teaching, +concerning the nature of the state or place of abode of the departed +spirits of men; but, on the contrary, is common to all form of religion +and to all phases of belief in the survival of the human soul. +Therefore, a scientific consideration of the general subject does not +necessitate the acceptance of any one particular phase of religious +belief, or of any particular system of teaching concerning the nature or +state of "life after death." All that is required of the person +accepting the general fact of "higher plane communication" may be stated +as follows: (1) Acceptance of the fact that the human soul persists +after the death of the body, and independent of and removed from the +dead body; (2) acceptance of the fact that the decarnate souls of human +beings may, and do, establish communication with human beings still +dwelling upon the earth-plane of existence. + +We may state here that the term "decarnate" means "away from the +physical body," or "out of the flesh;" the term being the opposite of +"incarnate," meaning "clothed with flesh, or embodied in flesh." We may +also state here that the teachings of most philosophies of the life +after death hold that the decarnate human soul is not entirely devoid of +a body, but rather occupies a body composed of some ethereal substance; +this ethereal body being called the "astral body," or the "spiritual +body." + + +The Ideals of Modern Spiritualism. + +A writer well expresses the ideals of modern western spiritualism as +follows: "Through the gateway of mediumship for upwards of fifty years +the world has been catching glimpses of the glory of the land immortal, +and visitants from that 'bourne' from whence it has been erroneously +said that 'no traveler returns' have made their presence known beyond +all doubt or denial, thus proving the continued conscious existence of +human beings and the sequential chapter of the life hereafter. Though +the messages from the unseen have at times been imperfect and +fragmentary, still they have been MESSAGES. If but telegraphic +dispatches, so to speak, instead of voluminous letters; or like +telephonic snatches of conversation rather than face-to-face outpourings +of thought and feeling, still they have been greetings and comforting +assurances of undying affection from the people living in the land +'beyond the veil.' Although many a sorrowing soul has longed for further +revelation, and regretted the inability of the spirits to comply with +the requests for fuller information, still the gates have been ajar, and +sometimes it has truly seemed as though they had been flung wide +open--so clear and consoling were the messages from the loved ones on +the other side of death's valley of shadow. The manifestations of the +presence of spirits and the evidences of their identity, which have been +accumulating during all these years, have solved the 'great secret,' and +we know that death is not a CUL-DE-SAC, but a thoroughfare. The dread of +death disappeared altogether with the mists of ignorance, as, through +the gateway of mediumship, the shining presence of ministering spirits, +'our very own dear departed,' illumined the pathway which we must all +tread to our great promotion. + + +Immortality Demonstrated Through Mediumship. + +"'Immortality demonstrated through mediumship' should be inscribed upon +the banner of spiritualism, for the fact of life beyond the incident of +death has been proved beyond all peradventure to millions of intelligent +and enlightened people since the new spiritual era was inaugurated. To +mediums--the modern mediators--therefore belong the office and honor of +rolling back the stone from the tomb and establishing faith upon the +firm basis of knowledge (scientifically ascertained and proven) of the +continued intelligent existence in the spiritual realms of those who +went forth through the death change into light and liberty 'over there.' +Mediums, as intermediaries, have enabled spirit people to comfort the +sad and encourage the weak; to relieve the doubter and console the +bereaved; to confirm the old-world traditions regarding bygone spirit +intervention and revelation, and supplement our hopes and intuitions +with proof palpable. Present day experiences of inspiration and spirit +manifestation make credible and acceptable many things in ancient +records which must otherwise have been discarded as superstitious and +false. Spiritualism redeems the so-called 'supernatural' and +'miraculous' occurrences of the Bible, by explaining them and proving +the naturalness. The capability claimed for old-time seers and prophets +to see angels and hear voices is now known to be a natural faculty, +which, in certain people, is perfectly normal while it can be induced in +others by the influence of operators in or out of the body. IT CAN ALSO +BE CULTIVATED TO SOME DEGREE BY MOST PEOPLE WHO CARE TO STUDY THE +NECESSARY CONDITIONS FOR ITS DEVELOPMENT AND EXERCISE. The famine, 'not +of bread, nor of water, but of hearing words from the Lord,' and the +loss of 'open vision' of the spirit, which afflicted Christendom for so +many years (because of the blind intolerance of zealots who, in their +adherence to the 'letter,' crushed out the sensitives through whom the +'spirit' might have been revealed), that famine is rapidly passing away, +and we are being fed with the living bread of spiritual inspiration, and +are growing strong enough to welcome the messengers who come to us +through the gateway of mediumship from their after-death home. + + +The Truth of Personal Survival. + +"When once there is established the conviction of the truth of personal +survival of our loved ones, and the actual and satisfactory +demonstrations thereof through mediumship (and we know of no means +whereby such evidences can be obtained save through mediumship), we are +thrilled and delighted; and when this conviction is borne upon us and +driven home by the evidences, and the truth of spirit ministry has been +realized, nothing can destroy it. The spiritualist stands upon firm +ground--the impregnable rock of ascertained fact. He knows that +intercourse between the two worlds is real, continuous; therefore he is +proof against all speculations, denunciations, and adverse theories. +Dogmatic condemnations, 'bogey' cries, charges of fraud against mediums, +fail to move or frighten him. He can 'speak what he knows and testify to +what he has seen;' his positive and affirmative experience and testimony +outweigh all the opposition of 'doubting Thomases' who do not know. + + +The Gateway of Mediumship. + +"Through the gateway of mediumship the spirits make themselves known in +a variety of ways. There are many phases of mediumistic phenomena, and +the student will find that he must be patient, painstaking, and +persevering if he would make sure of his facts. Careful investigation, +possibly prolonged research, under many difficulties and with many +discouragements, will be required, but 'success is certain if energy +fail not,' and the results will adequately recompense him for all +sacrifice and struggle! For in the light of the demonstrated fact of +continued existence after death, it is clear that man is even now 'a +spirit served by organs'--that consequently the basis of all religious +experience and affirmation is the spiritual consciousness of mankind. +There could be no revelation to man of spiritual truth or moral duty if +he were not a spirit possessing the capabilities of receiving and +comprehending, of interpreting and applying, the revelations and +inspirations which appeal to and quicken the inner (and higher) self." + + +The Mediumistic Character. + +The following quotations from eminent modern spiritualists will further +serve to illustrate the accepted general principles of "spirit +communication" on the part of western spiritualism. E. W. Wallis says: +"Spiritualism deals with a higher range and a wider field of +supersensuous phenomena than mesmerism, hypnotism, telepathic +psychometry, clairvoyance, etc., because the natural susceptibility of +man in these directions is increased and intensified, and exercised upon +a superior plane, when it is utilized by intelligent spirit operators. +It is not true that sensitiveness is confined to those who are diseased, +weak of will, neurotic, or hysterical. Those who are susceptible to +psychic influence may be impulsive, warm-hearted, spontaneous, sociable, +and not by any means, or of necessity, weak-minded or vicious." Dr. Dean +Clake says: "The word mediumship, as understood and used by +spiritualists, technically speaking, means a susceptibility to the +influence, and more or less control, of decarnated spirits. +Physiologically, it means a peculiar nervous susceptibility to what may +be termed the 'psychic force,' which spirits use to move the mind or +body or both, of their mortal instrument. Psychologically, it signifies +a passive or negative state of mind and body which renders a person +subject to the positive will-power of spirits who influence him or her." +The spirit control who employed the hand of Stainton Moses, M.A., to +write his thoughts, said: "The mediumistic peculiarity is one of spirit +solely, and not of body, seeing that it occurs in all varieties of +physical frames, in the male and in the female; in the magnetic and in +the electric; in the stout and robust as well as in the puny and thin of +body; in the old and in the young; in all conditions and under all +circumstances. This alone would lead you to see that it is not a +physical matter; and that conclusion is strengthened for you by the fact +that the gift is perpetuated even after death of the earth body. Those +who on your earth have been mediums retain the gift and use it with us. +They are the most frequent visitors to your world; they communicate most +readily; and it is through them that spirits who have not the gift are +enabled to communicate with your earth." + + +Mediumistic Sensitivity. + +Emma Hardinge Britten said: "Whatever that force may be which +constitutes the difference between a 'medium' and a non-medium, it is +certainly of a mental and magnetic character--that is, a combination of +the subtle elements of mind and magnetism, and therefore of a +psychological and not of a purely physical character. Whilst the +spiritualists of this generation have had no one to teach them either +what spiritual gifts are, or how to use, or how to abuse them, +experience has shown that the conditions under which spiritual phenomena +are produced through mediums are not only helped or hindered by their +mental states, but also by the will, magnetism, and mental states of +those who surround them." E. W. Wallis says: "The same laws govern the +relations between the sensitive and the spirit operator as between the +hypnotist and his subject. Therefore, mediumship is not necessarily +spiritual; it may be of all kinds; there may be psychical relationship +of a high grade and of a low one. There may be messages from beyond that +prove the identity of spirits, and give evidence of the continuity of +life, of the survival of mind, and yet they may not minister to +spiritual growth, nor awaken any exalted desire to be of service to God +and man. There may be psychical sympathy and not spiritual fellowship; +there may be spirit intercourse and not that sweet spiritual communion +which should be the goal of all who seek for evidences of life beyond +the valley of death. It is no longer possible to regard mediumship as a +supernatural endowment. It is, as regards the psychic susceptibility +upon which it depends, the common property of the race, and is therefore +as natural as are the 'gifts' of song or oratory, or the ability to +paint or construct. But as certain gifts and graces are more developed +in some individuals than in others, in like manner the sensitiveness +which is called mediumship is more highly developed (or is capable of +such development) in certain peculiarly constituted persons who may be +regarded as supernormally gifted, yet as naturally so as are geniuses in +other directions." + + +The Higher Vibratory Forces. + +The student who has carefully read what we have said in the earlier +portions of the present book regarding the subject of Nature's Finer +Forces, and those concerned with "vibrations," and "planes of being," +will be able to harmonize the apparently somewhat conflicting opinions +of those authorities above quoted concerning the nature of mediumship +and spirit communication. In the first place, the student will remember +that there exist planes of being higher and other than our own +earth-plane, and that the rate of normal vibration on such planes is +much higher than are those upon our own earth-plane. In the second +place, he will remember that beings dwelling and manifesting on these +higher planes are able to communicate only by means of their higher +vibratory rate of manifestation. And, in the third place, he will +remember that a person dwelling on the earth-plane will not ordinarily +register and interpret these higher vibrations of communication; and +that it is necessary for such a person to have originally, or else have +developed, the capacity to raise his or her own vibrations to the key +necessary to "catch" these higher vibrations. In short, we have here +once more another instance of that "attunement" between sender and +receiver the most common instance of which is the wireless telegraph. + + +Psychic Attunement. + +The entity, or spirit, dwelling on one of the many higher planes of +being who wishes to communicate with persons on earth through a medium, +must first select some person capable of raising his or her own +vibratory rate of consciousness to become "in tune" with that of the +spirit himself. Then he must learn to project his own mental vibrations +with sufficient intensity and force to be "caught" by the sensitive +perceptive organism of the medium. These things are beyond the +understanding and accomplishment of many decarnate spirits, and unless +they are taught by some one on their own plane of existence they are +likely to fail in their attempts to communicate through a medium on the +earth-plane. But at the present time, in view of the great interest +being manifested "over there" in the communication with the earth-plane, +an earnest, persevering spirit will usually have comparatively little +difficulty in finding a proper instructor, and in acquiring the art of +"earth-plane communication," as it is called on the spirit plane. + + +The Development of Mediumship. + +As regards the acquirement of mediumship qualities, information and +scientific instruction is much needed, particularly at the present time. +In this book we shall endeavor to throw much light upon this particular +matter, and to give such instruction and information in a plain, +practical form. We may begin by reminding the candidate for mediumship +that the methods of development of mediumship are entirely different +from those designed to develop ordinary psychic powers. In the case of +development for ordinary psychic power, the person must acquire the +power of concentration in the direction of sensing in his inner +consciousness the impressions coming to him from the outside world, such +impressions not being consciously directed to him. He must be able to so +concentrate that he will be keenly sensitive to these impressions, and +to interpret them intelligently. On the contrary, the person wishing to +develop the power of mediumship must learn to develop the power of +negative receptivity to the vibrations coming from the spirit planes. As +has well been said, he is the acted upon, and not the actor. While he +requires concentration, patience, and perseverance in developing the +power to raise himself to the proper vibratory key, when the actual work +of communication begins he must passively allow himself to speak and +act, more or less unconsciously, under the guidance, direction, and +control of the communicating spirit. + + +Unconscious Mediumship. + +The student will do well, however, to remember that as a popular writer +has said: "It must not, however, be supposed that spirit influence is +limited to, and exerted solely upon, those who are known to be mediums; +or that the spirits do not assist those who use their own psychic +faculties. It is probable that all people who are psychically sensitive +and open to impressions are indebted to spirit helpers, whether they are +conscious of the fact or not. There is undoubtedly a greater degree of +influx from the spirit side than even spiritualists are aware. Many +persons are indebted to spirit friends for spontaneous impulses, which, +while those persons act upon them and reap the consequences, they can +neither explain nor trace to their source. Spirits frequently associate +with and serve their earth friends, although the recipients of their +benefactions are unaware of the fact. There would be very much more of +this kind of guidance from the unseen, if, instead of being frightened, +or repellant in their mental attitude toward the spirits, the great bulk +of people were prepared to accept such assistance from the other side as +perfectly natural and to be expected." + + +Mediumship and Individuality. + +The student will find it desirable to acquaint himself with the best +opinions concerning the possible or probable effects of the practice of +mediumistic powers upon the medium himself. There is evidenced a +disposition in certain quarters to hold to the idea that mediumship, or +control by spirits, is more or less injurious, mentally or physically or +both, to the medium. It is also frequently asserted that the medium +tends to lose his individuality and personal strength of character. +Again, there are some who would teach that the medium should be of a low +order of intelligence, and should beware of exercising his intellect, +the idea seeming to be that under these conditions the mental path will +be freer and clearer for the spirit control. All of the aforesaid +notions are erroneous, as will appear as we progress in the statements +in this book concerning true and efficient mediumship. + + +Co-operation of Medium and Spirits. + +The medium who observes certain simple and plain rules and habits of +conduct will not suffer any loss of strength of character or +individuality from his exercise of his mediumistic power; on the +contrary, an intelligent exercise of the power of mediumship often tends +to develop the intellectual power of the medium. As to the idea that the +medium must be ignorant, we have but to call your attention to the fact +that many of the most efficient mediums are intelligent, and even +brilliant individuals. As a writer has said: "There may be some mediums +who are ignoramuses, but it is doubtful if there will be any great +degree of intelligence or great spiritual illumination presented through +their agency. It is possible that some mediums act foolishly when in +their normal state, for the purpose of accentuating the difference +between their ordinary and supernormal conditions of mental activity; +but there is a more rational, intelligent, and, indeed, a more spiritual +conception of the relations which should exist between mediums and their +spirit guides, which is rapidly finding favor with thoughtful mediums +and spiritualists alike. The proper method of communing with the spirits +of the unseen realm is conducive to good, and not evil, to the medium. +The co-operative association of medium and spirit on the plane of +thought and purpose, emotion and motive, ethics and inspiration, results +in the education and elevation of the medium." + + +Mediumship Not Dangerous. + +The following additional quotations from spiritualistic writers on this +point, serve to throw important light on this subject. J. J. Morse says: +"Andrew Jackson Davis, Hudson Tuttle, and other writers, if I correctly +understand them, claim that mediumship is a constitutional condition, +and depends upon nervous adaptation, i.e., 'sensitiveness' and the +quickening of the subjective (psychical) faculties; and, personally, my +own firm conviction is that there is nothing dangerous in mediumship. +The mere dabbling in mediumship, as either the means of a new sensation, +or for the gratification of personal vanity, is to be thoroughly +deprecated, as a perversion of some of the most wonderful possibilities +of our natures; while the prosecution of mediumship, or anything else, +to the detriment of mind, nerves, or health, in any direction, is a sin +against oneself, and will inevitably call down the resultant penalties +of physical and mental deterioration. I have many times advised +inquirers who wished to know how to develop mediumship, unless they +desired to do so for serious use, and within proper limits, not to seek +its development at all. And in cases where I could see it would prove +personally detrimental, I have strongly advised the inquirer to let the +matter entirely alone." + +Wallis says: "Very much depends upon the objects entertained by the +medium and the sitters, as also upon the character and intentions of the +spirit who seeks to manifest his presence; but, on general lines, where +people of average intelligence and rectitude seek communion with those +they have known and esteemed, or loved, the results are almost +invariably beneficial. There is every reason why this should be so if +the common-sense precautions are observed of keeping a level head, +exercising patience, exhibiting unselfishness and sincerity, and +desiring good spiritual counsel and fellowship." + +A. Morton says: "Elevated spirits do not require mediums to surrender +their reason; on the contrary, they advise that every new thought should +be tested in the crucible of reason, and that it be rejected if not in +accordance therewith; but the control of domineering spirits, claiming +the name of celebrities, who present unreasonable theories, and in a +dictatorial 'thus saith the spirit' manner, demanding unquestioning +compliance with their commands, must be rejected by all mediums as +debasing and inconsistent with self respect. Any associations or +concessions which have a tendency to lower the spiritual standard must +be carefully avoided, for there is no growth in any relations which can +only be maintained by the sacrifice of self-respect and self-justice." + + +Rational Mediumship. + +Wallis says: "The rational course for mediums and inquirers to follow is +assuredly that of avoiding the extremes alike of credulity and sceptical +incredulity, by letting the spirits do their best and then collating the +facts observed and drawing conclusions. Care, patience, and perseverance +will save both mediums and inquirers from many misconceptions and enable +them to avoid the errors of others. Above all, mediums should observe +their own feelings, study their own experiences, try to understand and +co-operate with the spirits, but never yield servile or slavish service, +nor permit themselves to be swayed by flattery nor dominated by any +spirit (in the circle or on the spirit side) who claims obedience, poses +as an 'authority,' or refuses to recognize the rights of others. No +medium should remain ignorant, or refrain from giving effect to his (or +her) natural desire for knowledge and self-improvement under the +erroneous idea that he does not need to think, study, or learn, because +he is a medium; and that the spirits will provide and teach through him +all that is required. On the other hand, while thoughtfully observant of +favorable conditions, and intelligent in self-study and culture, the +medium should avoid 'getting up' certain subjects, or thinking along +certain lines with the purpose and expectation that such information +will be employed while under control. Such action, proceeding from a +wrong motive, cannot fail to injure the psychic relations between the +spirit and the medium, and will render the work of control doubly hard, +because such thoughts will have to be cleared away before those of the +spirit can be transferred to, and have free course through, the medium." + + +The "Home Circle." + +Mediums are born or made. That is to say, many persons are born with the +gift of mediumship, while others, lacking this natural power, are able +to develop the power by practice and gradual unfoldment. Some of the +world's best mediums have been developed, while others in the same class +have been born with the gift. At the same time, it must be remembered +that there is a wide range of power existing between different +individual mediums of both of these classes. In the opinion of the +present writer, perhaps the very best way of developing mediumistic +powers is that of actually participating in "circle work." The wonderful +results of earlier spiritualism in America and in Europe were +undoubtedly due to the casual and general practice of holding "home +circles." These home circles were the nursery of some of the world's +greatest mediums. Here the born medium was made aware of his or her +natural powers; and, likewise, here others were enabled to gradually +unfold and develop their latent mediumistic power. + + +The Cure for Fraudulent Mediumship. + +At the present time we have too few mediums, and this fact is +attributable largely to the gradual discontinuance of the home circles. +Present time folks are too fond of having everything worked out and +presented to them, and they flock to the sensational public +demonstrations, some of which are undoubtedly "faked" in order to meet +the public demand for sensational features; and at the same time the +honest, careful, conscientious mediums are often overlooked, and the +home circles almost unknown. Many so-called investigators of +spiritualism are feverishly anxious to "see something," and are +impatient and the comparatively slow order of developments at the home +circle or at the careful mediumistic circles. Many earnest spiritualists +lament the present tendency, and predict that in time there will be an +almost complete dearth of honest, careful mediums, owing to the demand +for "quick action" and the temptation to furnish fraudulent counterfeits +of the genuine phenomena resulting from this feverish public demand. + + +Warning to Young Mediums. + +Wallis says concerning this point: "After a time, as the development +progresses, the medium and his spirit friends may be strong enough to +undertake public work without the assistance and protection of a circle, +in the same manner as did D. Home, Slade, Eglinton, and other noted +public mediums; but they should be in no hurry about doing so, and they +need to be very self-possessed and level-headed to hold their own +against the 'phenomena hunters' on the one side (who sap the very life +of the sensitive), and the know-all, conceited sceptics on the other +side (who freeze up all the psychic conditions), and before whom it is +worse than foolish to cast these pearls of great price. + +"The lot of the public 'physical,' 'test,' and 'clairvoyant' medium is +not to be envied or lightly chosen. Such sensitives frequently suffer a +martyrdom that none but sensitives can realize. What with foolish +flatterers; the sitters who are never content, but cry 'give, give, +give;' the injudicious friends, who seeing the exhaustion of the +worn-out mediums, in mistaken sympathy urge them to take stimulants +(instead of securing them rest and change of surroundings), they have a +hard road to travel, and our sincerest sympathy goes out to them all. We +plead for them. We bespeak kindly and human consideration. Too +frequently they are tried and condemned unheard. They are expected to +prove that they are NOT frauds, instead of, as in other cases, being +accepted as reputable people. So much has this been the case that some +mediums of unquestioned power have retired into private life and +business pursuits, where they meet with the respect and recognition +which were denied them while they were public workers in the ranks of +spiritualism. + +"Let us not be misunderstood. In saying this we are not apologizing for, +or palliating fraud or wrong doing, but merely asking for fair and +considerate treatment--not hasty, unreasoning condemnation. While it is +true that mediumship has many compensations, and the medium who takes +pleasure in his work has many pleasant experiences, it is also true that +the professional medium is too frequently subjected to treatment which +makes his task more difficult and thankless than it need be. The kindly +and appreciative treatment which he receives from some sitters is a +welcome stimulus, and affords good conditions for the spirits, who are +thus enabled to operate to the best advantage." + + + + +PART VII + +MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS + + +Mediumistic phenomena, i.e., the phenomena by and through which spirits +manifest their presence and demonstrate their power, may be broadly +classified under two heads, as follows, (1) physical phenomena, and (2) +mental phenomena. + + +Physical Phenomena. + +PHYSICAL PHENOMENA cover a wide range of mediumistic manifestations, +among which are movements of tables, the production of "raps," the +manifestation of spirit lights, freedom from the effects of fire, the +passage of matter through matter, direct writing upon paper or upon +slates, direct voices, levitation of the medium, spirit photographs, and +the production of the materialized form of the spirit. While in rare +cases the spirits may manifest these forms of physical phenomena without +the assistance of the medium and the circle, nevertheless as a rule such +phenomena are produced by the spirits only through the assistance of a +medium, and usually only when there is gathered together a circle. + + +"Psychic Force." + +Various explanations of the power employed by the spirits, assisted by +the medium and by the circle, have been offered by the scientific +investigators of the subject. The most generally accepted theory of the +western scientists is that the spirits employ what is called the +"psychic force" of the medium, often assisted by that drawn from the +circle and focused in the medium. The medium is regarded as a psychic +storage battery which is freely drawn upon by the manifesting spirit. +The degree and character of the manifestations are determined largely by +the peculiar quality of the psychic force, the capabilities of the +medium, the knowledge and powers of the spirits, and the influence of +the sitters. + + +Human Magnetism. + +Dr. Dean Clarke says: "Human magnetism, or nerve aura, is probably the +most sublimated form of ethereal matter, hence nearest in refinement to +spirit substance, and therefore spirits use it as the vehicle of their +vibrating forces. Those persons who have an excess of magnetism, of the +proper quality to unite with both the psychic force of spirits and the +forces inherent in natural objects, and thus form an electro-magnetic +connection of spirits with the objects they wish to act upon, are the +persons chosen by the spirits for physical mediums. The mind and brain +of the medium are not often nor necessarily controlled, and only his +magnetism and psychic forces are used, through which the spirits +transmit the vibrations of their own power to mechanically produce +concussions, or movements of material objects." + + +"Zoether." + +Hudson Tuttle (writing under control) gives the following statement of a +spirit concerning the manner in which physical phenomena are produced: +"Zoether (psychic force) emanating from the medium charges the object to +be moved, and a band of spirits directs a current of their own zoethic +emanation in the direction they desire the article to move, and it +passes along the current thus produced. The charging of the object by +the medium is necessary in order that it may be in a state of vibration +harmonious to the spirit current. If this current be directed against +the table or other charged body, raps or concussions are produced, as a +positive and negative relation exists between the spirits and the +medium's zoether. One spirit alone cannot produce physical +manifestations. If one purports to communicate, assistance will be +rendered by many others, who combine their influence." + + +"Prana." + +The orientals account for physical mediumistic phenomena in a similar +way, though their terms are different. Instead of speaking of zoether, +or psychic force, they always employ the term "prana." In the oriental +philosophies "prana" is explained as a subtle form of energy permeating +the universe, but manifesting in a special form in the organism of the +human being. This subtle force, or prana, is held to be capable of being +transmitted from one organism to another, and is held to be the +energizing power by means of which many forms of occult or magic +phenomena are produced. Prana is very much akin to the "human magnetism" +of the western occultists, and the properties attributed to the latter +are really those which the orientals for centuries past have held to be +among the essential properties of prana; so, at the last, there is found +to be a practical agreement here between the oriental and the western +schools of occultism, respectively, in spite of their differing +terminology. + + +Mental Phenomena. + +MENTAL PHENOMENA cover another wide range of mediumistic phenomena, +among which may be mentioned the following, viz., involuntary or +automatic writing and drawing, writing by means of the planchette or +"ouija" board or similar mechanical aid to writing, clairvoyant +perception of spirits, clairaudient hearing of spirit voices, prophetic +utterances of spirits, impersonating and inspirational control of the +medium. Mediums are frequently so thoroughly "under the influence or +control," especially in private circle seances, that they seem to have +been transformed into another personality. Sometimes the medium through +which the spirit is manifesting will have his facial appearance changed +so completely that persons present will recognize in the changed +appearance the looks of the spirit as known when it was in earth life. + + +The Value of Phenomena. + +The chief value of physical mediumistic manifestations is not, as +generally supposed, that of affording entertainment or food for thought +for those witnessing them, but rather that of affording proof of the +possibility of spirit communication, particularly when spirit identity +is established through the manifestation of the phenomena. A writer +says of this class of phenomena: "A good psychographic medium will +usually obtain writing between closed slates, which may be brought by +the investigator, who can insist upon their not leaving his sight, and +not even leaving his hand. We have obtained writing on paper that we had +previously marked, which was then covered by our own hand, and a +friend's and was untouched by the medium. On another occasion, a slate +which we had personally cleaned was laid on the floor (fully six feet +from the medium) with a small piece of pencil under it (in broad +daylight), and on taking it up shortly afterwards there was found +written on the under side a long message of a private nature from a +deceased friend, of whom we were not thinking. Such phenomena as these +are still good and impressive, they cannot be counterfeited under like +conditions, and even when no proof of identity is given in connection +with the writings, they point so distinctly to the action of a discrete, +disembodied intelligence as to compel the recognition of their spiritual +origin. The evidential utility of physical phenomena lies in their being +inimitable by fraud. Imitations can of course be made which might +satisfy the credible and the gullible, but the conditions for testing +the phenomena we have specially referred to are so simple that no +rational investigator need be deceived; first, to be sure that the +slate, paper, or panel to be used is perfectly blank; second, that it +does not leave the hand of the inquirer, or if it does, that it is +marked in such a way that there can be no doubt of its identification +when it is returned to him; and thirdly (with paintings), to observe if +the paint be wet, and note the time occupied in their production." + + +Trance Condition Not Essential. + +Many persons are under the impression that it is necessary for a medium +to go into the trance condition in order to manifest physical +mediumistic phenomena, but such is not the case. While many mediums do +lapse into the trance conditions at such time, it is equally true that +many others do not do so. Some of the very best mediums produce some of +the most striking manifestations while in a perfectly normal, waking +condition. A writer says of a well-known medium: "She constantly +receives evidences of the presence of her spirit friends while she is +perfectly normal. We have heard rappings and witnessed movements of +physical objects in her presence, while holding friendly conversation +with her, when we have been in a good light. Frequently, at meal times, +the spirits announce their presence by raps, and respond to the +salutations and questions of their medium and other members of the +family." + +Professor Loveland says: "Many of the best mediums in the world were +never entranced in the sense of being in an unconscious sleep. And it is +doubted whether that condition is desirable. The Fox girls, and most, if +not all of the original rapping mediums, were never in the deep sleep +trance. It is not necessary for any of the physical manifestations, and +that includes a very large percentage of all the spirit phenomena. The +rappings, tippings, movings, slate writings, automatic writings, +paintings, telegraphing, voices, materializing, etc., can all occur +without the sleep trance, the reason for which is very apparent, as in +the production of such phenomena the spirits simply use the surplus +radiated nerve-force of the medium." + + +Scientific Reports on Phenomena. + +Sir William Crookes, in speaking of D. D. Home and Euspasia Paladino, +said: "Most, if not all, of the occurrences with Euspasia seem to have +taken place when she was in a trance, and the more complete the trance +the more striking the phenomena. This was not always so with Home. +Certainly the two most striking things I ever saw with him, the fire +test and the visible forms, were to be observed while he was entranced, +but it was not always easy to tell when he was in that state, for he +spoke and moved about almost as if he were in his normal condition; the +chief differences being that his actions were more deliberate, and his +manner and expressions more solemn, and he always spoke of himself in +the third person, as 'Dan.' When he was not in a trance we frequently +had movements of objects in different parts of the room, with visible +hands carrying flowers about and playing the accordion. On one occasion +I was asked by Home to look at the accordion as it was playing in the +semi-darkness beneath the table. I saw a delicate looking female hand +holding it by the handle, and the keys at the lower end rising and +falling as if fingers were playing on them, although I could not see +them. So lifelike was the hand that at first I said it was my +sister-in-law's, but was assured by all present that both her hands were +on the table, a fact which I then verified for myself." + + +Phenomena Without Darkness. + +"Home always refused to sit in the dark. He said that, with firmness and +perseverance, the phenomena could be got just as well in the light, and +even if some of the things were not so strong, the evidence of one's +eyesight was worth making same sacrifices for. In almost all the seances +I had with Home there was plenty of light to see all that occurred, and +not only to enable me to write down notes of what was taking place, but +to read my notes without difficulty. Home was very anxious to let +everyone present be satisfied that he was not doing any of the things +himself--too anxious, I sometimes thought, for frequently he would +interfere with the progress and development of what was going on by +insisting that some sceptic or other should come around and take hold of +his hands and feet to be sure he was not doing anything himself. At +times, he would push his chair back and move right away from the table +when things were moving on it, and ask those furthest from him to come +round and satisfy themselves that he had nothing to do with the +movements. I used frequently to beg him to be quiet, knowing that, if he +would not move about in his eagerness to convince us of his genuineness, +the strength of the phenomena would probably increase to such a degree +that no further evidence would be needed that their production was +beyond the powers of the medium. + + +Test Conditions. + +"During the whole of my knowledge of D. D. Home, extending for several +years, I never once saw the slightest occurrence that would make me +suspicious that he was attempting to play tricks. He was scrupulously +sensitive on this point, and never felt hurt at anyone taking +precautions against deception. He sometimes, in the early days of our +acquaintance, used to say to me before a seance, 'Now, William, I want +you to act as if I were a recognized conjurer, and was going to cheat +you and play all the tricks I could. Take every precaution you can +devise against me, and move about and look under the table or where else +you like. Don't consider my feelings. I shall not be offended. I know +that the more carefully I am tested the more convinced will everyone be +that these abnormal occurrences are not of my own doings.' Latterly, I +used jokingly to say to him, 'Let us sit round the fire and have a quiet +chat, and see if our friends are here and will do anything for us. We +won't have any tests or precautions.' On these occasions, when only my +family were present with him, some of the most convincing phenomena took +place." + + +Is Darkness Necessary? + +From the above it is seen that not only is the trance condition not +absolutely necessary for the production of striking mediumistic +phenomena, but that, also, there is no absolute necessity for the +condition of darkness to be maintained as an essential feature of such +phenomena. While many mediums insist upon the condition of darkness at +seances, it is thought by some careful thinkers that this arises from +the fact that such mediums have been accustomed to such conditions from +their earliest days of mediumship, and have grown to believe that the +same are absolutely necessary. It is thought that if such mediums would +begin over again, practicing in full light in the company of a few +sympathetic friends, they would before long grow accustomed to the new +conditions, and would then be able to reproduce all of their most +important phenomena in full light. Using the terms of modern psychology, +it would seem that such mediums are the victims of their own +"auto-suggestion," and fixed beliefs; and, as all students of the +subject well know, the mental states of the medium have a most important +bearing of the quality of the phenomena produced, and form a very +important factor of the conditions governing the success of the seance. + + +Developing Circles. + +The person who is developing mediumship will do well to surround himself +with persons of a certain type of psychical power, and to form circles +of such persons. Such persons are invaluable in constituting a +"developing circle." Such persons need not be mediumistic themselves, +nor are they required to actually do anything. Instead, their service is +that of being present as psychical reservoirs of force upon which the +spirits can draw for manifesting power. The medium, being sensitive to +helpful influences, and the reverse, will recognize such persons by the +congenial and harmonious influence they exercise upon him; and he will +do well to encourage such persons to sit in his developing circles. + + +Impersonating Mediumship. + +What is known as "impersonating mediumship" occurs where the medium is +so completely under the control of the manifesting spirit that he will +exhibit, often in a marvelously accurate manner, the personal +characteristics and mannerisms of the spirit, and which are readily +recognized as such by the spirit's surviving friends in earth-life. +Sometimes the medium will actually re-enact the dying moments of the +controlling spirit. In many cases such impersonations have been so +nearly photographically and phonographically correct that they have +afforded the most convincing proof to investigators, and in other cases +have been a great consolation to relatives of the spirit who have been +thus assured that their loved one was still in actual existence on a +higher plane of being. These results, however, are possible only when a +very close rapport condition has been established between the spirit and +the medium. In cases in which such a close rapport condition is +obtained, and a high degree of harmony developed, the spirit will be +able to positively establish his identity by causing the medium to utter +his exact words, and to give names, dates, and close details of +incidents occurring in his earth life, and often to employ his exact set +phrases and verbal tricks of speech, so as to bring to the consciousness +of the sitters the realization that they are in the actual presence of +the decarnate spirit friend. + + +The Proper Mental Condition. + +The young medium, however, should beware against striving too hard to be +the instrument of the phenomena of spirit impersonation. For a too +intense anxiety, and desire to please sitters, frequently tends to +produce a cloudy mental state in which the ideas in the mind of the +medium blend with the spirit communication, and thus produces a most +unsatisfactory result, and one which is apt to confuse the minds of the +sitters and sometimes actual arouse suspicion that the medium is trying +to practice deception. For this reason the young medium should not seek +the attendance of persons desiring "test seances;" at least, such should +be his course until he has learned not to be carried away with his +desire to please or to satisfy such persons attending his circles. He +should endeavor to cultivate a mental condition of calmness, and a +determination not to influence or to interfere with the spirit +communications in any way whatsoever, but, instead, to allow himself to +become a passive instrument for the communication. The medium should +remember that he is not a dealer in merchandise "warranted to please," +but is, instead, a medium of communication between the spirit and those +still in earth-life. + + +Demand Proof of Spirit Identity. + +A certain degree of care and caution, and the employment of honest +powers of discrimination, is necessary on the part of the sitters in +cases of spirit impersonation. This not because of any lack of honesty +on the part of the medium, but because of the habit of a mischievous +class of dwellers on the planes of spirit life to falsely impersonate +other spirits as such seances. As all investigators of the subject know +very well, it is not an infrequent thing for such mischievous and +meddlesome spirits to endeavor to pass themselves off as the relative or +friends of those in the circle, or even to falsely impersonate some +great historical personages. In such cases the sitters should insist +upon the spirit positively identifying himself, just as they would in +case of doubt regarding a person speaking to them over the telephone and +claiming to be such-and-such a person. And the proof demanded should be +similar to that which would be sought from the suspected telephone +talker. An honest spirit communicator does not object to such demands, +and is only too ready to do his best to furnish the right kind of proofs +concerning his identity. + + +The "Trance Condition." + +The psychic condition frequently attending the demonstration of +mediumship powers is usually spoken of as a "trance," but this term is +quite misleading, for it carries with it the suggestion of an entire +loss of consciousness and of a condition of more or less deep sleep. But +the mediumistic trance is seldom a deep sleep condition. Instead, it is +the condition similar to that of a profound "day dream," in which the +person is fully awake but in which the consciousness has been almost +entirely taken off the sights and sounds of the outside world. As a +writer has well said: "What is called 'trance mediumship' is seldom of +the nature of the deep sleep of entire unconsciousness. It is more +frequently the suspension of the ordinary consciousness of external +surroundings, a temporary oblivion on the outer plane--a semi-conscious +state, in fact--in which the subject does not retain the volitional +ability to employ his thinking powers, the latter having been 'switched +off,' so to speak, and the subject responds to the will of the spirit +control." + + +Spirit Inspiration. + +Wallis says, concerning the nature of a certain phase of spirit control: +"In the case of speaking mediumship, where general and philosophical +ideas are to be transmitted, the control is of a different order from +that exercised for test manifestations. It is more frequently of the +nature of 'suggestion.' The spirit suggestionist suggests to the medium +a certain train of ideas, and then stimulates the brain and the organs +of expression to do the work of dressing up the thoughts and giving them +utterance. Unless the subject is a scientific or a biographical one, in +which specific terms are required and accurate data are to be imparted, +the relationship between the 'inspired' speaker and the spirit control +partakes more of the character of the engineer who feeds the fire and +directs the movements of his engine, while the machine does the work, +than it does of the actual voicing of the exact words, embodying in a +full and complete fashion the ideas the spirit wishes to have expressed. + + +Spirit Suggestion. + +"At first the operator may succeed by very imperfectly stimulating the +brain of the sensitive and causing the cerebration and expression of his +thoughts. The utterances may bear but a slight resemblance to what the +spirit intended to express. The vocabulary is that of the medium, and +the form in which the speech is cast of necessity partakes of the mold +familiar to the sensitive--but, by continued close association and +frequent control of the medium, the operator gains experience which +enables him to exert a more decided influence; and the sensitive, +becoming attuned, responds to and expresses the thoughts of the spirit +with greater clearness and precision. Just as those who dwell together +unconsciously approach nearer to each other and acquire a similarity in +their mode of thought and of expressing their ideas (the more dominant +personality impressing itself upon the less positive), so the medium +imperceptibly, and very often unconsciously, acquires facility and +proficiency in thought and elocutionary expression as the result of the +co-operation between himself and his spirit guide." + + +Psychic Attunement. + +Those who have read the above carefully stated opinion, will begin to +see the reason why certain mediums who have attained the greatest +proficiency in certain forms of mediumship, and who have become what are +known as "reliable mediums," almost always have some particular spirit +guide or guides with whom they have become in almost perfect psychic +harmony and attunement. These harmonious spirits are not only enabled to +express themselves with a high degree of clearness and power through +their favorite medium, but are also enabled to assist in the production +of the best rapport conditions between other spirits wishing to +communicate and the said medium. There is a certain amount of spiritual +and psychic co-operation between spirit and medium which is attained +only by practice and continued association, which results in a psychic +attunement between them. The closer and more harmonious the relationship +existing between a spirit and his medium, the thinner is the veil +separating the two planes upon which they dwell. + + +Automatic Writing. + +In that phase of mediumship known as "automatic or inspirational +writing," there is manifested two distinct forms of spirit control of +the organism of the medium. In cases of pure automatic writing the +spirit controls the arm and hand muscles of the medium, and uses them to +write out the message under the direct and absolute control of the mind +and will of the spirit. Cases have been known in which both hands of the +medium have been so used by the spirit control, each hand writing a +distinct and separate message, and both being performed without any +consciousness of the nature of the message on the part of the medium. In +some cases of automatic writing the medium was engaged in thought about +other subjects, or even in reading or study from a book. This is true +not only in cases of automatic writing in which the hand is directly +employed, but also in those in which some mechanical device such as the +planchette or the ouija board intervenes. + + +Inspirational Writing. + +In inspirational writing, on the other hand, the spirit impresses the +message upon the mind of the medium, either as a whole, or else sentence +by sentence or even word by word--in all of such cases, be it noted, the +medium is aware of the substance of what he is about to write, either +the word, the sentence, or perhaps the entire message. In such cases, of +course, the medium retains control of his writing muscles and their +action, and the spirit control is merely a phase of higher telepathy, as +it were. When the message is impressed upon the mind of the medium word +by word, or sentence by sentence, the style is of course that of the +spirit exerting the control; but where the entire message is impressed +upon the mind of the medium, the style is usually a blending of that of +the spirit and that of the medium, for the medium is not likely to +remember the literal message as given him, but merely is conscious of +the general purport and meaning thereof, together with a few phrases or +expressions formed by the spirit mind. In such cases, of course, the +personality of the medium enters largely into the message, while in the +case of pure automatic writing the personality of the medium plays no +part whatsoever, and the personality of the spirit is present in its +entirety. This important distinction should be noted and remembered. + + +Gradual Development of Powers. + +Most mediums develop their powers of mediumship gradually, and pass +through a number of stages in their development of power. At first +they may obtain only raps, or possibly the tilting or movement of +tables. Then, very likely, they are moved to write, either +automatically or else inspirationally. Later they experience the +impulse to allow the spirit control to speak through their vocal +organism, but it is seldom that the spirit is able to do this at first +trial, as the medium is not as yet sufficiently sensitized or attuned +to the spirit, and, instead, they can but gurgle, gasp, and make +inarticulate sounds, or else shout, laugh, cry, or sing, and possibly +jabber some strange jargon or unknown tongue, or else simply utter a +series of sounds lacking in definite meaning. Later, the inarticulate +sound is succeeded by definite sentences--perhaps a message, or a +short address. Sometimes the spirit control will endeavor to relate +some of his earth-life experiences, or perhaps even to give an +impersonation manifestation. Often several different spirits strive to +manifest through the developing medium, taking turns as manifestation, +holding the control for only a few minutes and then giving place to +his successor. + + +Spirit Guides. + +As the development proceeds, it will be found that one or two particular +spirits will manifest a greater power than the others, and after +establishing a strong degree of harmony and attunement they will assume +the position of "guides" to the medium, and will accordingly begin to +work in his interests on their side of life, and to accept or reject +other spirits who seek to manifest through their medium. At this stage, +the medium is often sufficiently advanced to be used as the channel for +fuller and more complete manifestations, particularly in the direction +of inspirational speaking. Often the medium in this stage of development +is also able to manifest psychic powers which were formerly beyond his +ability, as for instance psychometry, clairvoyance, etc. Then if his +spirit guides be sufficiently advanced and powerful, and the medium be +sufficiently receptive and harmonious to their influences, they will +educate him to such an extent that he will be able, with their +assistance, to become an instrument for the production of still higher +forms of mediumistic phenomena. But the development is almost always +gradual and proceeds by successive and well-defined steps and stages. + + +No Loss of Individuality. + +In concluding this part of our book, we would call your attention to the +following statements made by writers along the lines of spiritualism in +the leading journals of that school of modern thought. The first writer +says: "There is no need for the medium to decline to be influenced or +controlled, by spirit friends for fear of losing his 'individuality,' +any more than he should insist upon asserting his freedom and refuse the +aid of tutors, lest they should infringe upon his sacred +'individuality.' What are called the unconscious phases of mediumship +generally lead up to loving co-operation with the wise and kindly souls +of the higher life in efforts to establish the fellowship of man; to +bring knowledge where ignorance now reigns; to banish the darkness by +the light of that spiritual communion which shall yet be a blessing to +the race; and reliance upon higher powers in or out of the body does not +mean that we sacrifice our own abilities, nor do we thus become exempt +from responsibility. Quite the reverse. It is the arrogance of +individualism against which we protest. In fact, there is no abiding +strength of purpose apart from the dependence every well-ordered mind +should accord to the Infinite Light and Wisdom and the beneficial +services which His wise and loving ministering spirits can render to us +if we are desirous and responsive." + + +Mediumship Beneficial. + +A second writer says: "There is no reason why the reactive consequences +of frequent control by enlightened and earnest spirits, even in the case +of the 'trance' medium, should not prove extremely beneficial to the +sensitive, and this, we believe, has been the case with many of the +speakers in the spiritualistic movement. Where the medium is +inspirational and ready to respond to the thought impulsations of the +control, it stands to reason that the transmitted ideas, and the +stimulation of the thought-faculties caused by the transference and +expression of the spirits' opinions, will not be lost to the medium. 'If +you will take one step we can more easily help you to take a second than +we could compel you to take the first if you were unprepared,' said a +spirit teacher to Mrs. Emma Hardinge Britten, and there need be no loss +of dignity or individuality, no injury to body or mind, but a gain of +strength and spiritual vigor, education of mind and stimulation of moral +purpose, by intelligent co-operation and temporary surrender on the +part of the medium to wise and loving spirit helpers and teachers." + + +Mediumship and The Bible. + +A third writer, Rev. H. E. Haweis, says in connection with the relation +of spiritualism with religion: "People now believe in the Bible because +of spiritualism; they do not believe in spiritualism because of the +Bible. Take up your Bible and you will find that there is not a single +phenomenon which is recorded there which does not occur at seances +today. Whether it be lights, sounds, the shaking of the house, the +coming through closed doors, the mighty rushing winds, levitation, +automatic writing, the speaking in tongues, we are acquainted with all +these phenomena; they occur every day in London as well as in the Acts +of the Apostles. It is incontestable that such things do occur, that in +the main the phenomena of spiritualism are reliable, and happen over and +over again, under test conditions, in the presence of witnesses; and +that similar phenomena are recorded in the Bible, which is written for +our learning. It is not an opinion, not a theory, but a fact. There is +chapter and verse for it, and this is what has rehabilitated the Bible. +The clergy ought to be very grateful to spiritualism for this, for they +could not have done it themselves. They tried, but they failed." + + + + +PART VIII + +HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP + + +Anyone is entitled to be considered a "medium" if he or she is +psychically sensitive and capable of receiving and responding to spirit +control or influence. Likewise, anyone is entitled to the designation +who is capable of so generating freely a sufficient quantity of "psychic +force," magnetism, prana, or whatever other name we may choose to apply +to the force which is generated in the human organism and is capable of +being employed by the spirits in order to produce mediumistic phenomena +of the class usually referred to as "physical phenomena." As we have +seen, the spirits themselves are not usually able to manufacture or +generate by themselves this psychic required to produce the said +phenomena, but, on the contrary, must depend upon mediumistic +individuals for such force. + + +Who Are Mediumistic? + +Many persons are more or less naturally sensitive to spirit influence, +and therefore mediumistic. In many cases these persons tend to take on +the psychic conditions of others, both those in earth life and those on +the spirit plane of existence, without realizing the nature of the +influence operating on them. Such persons are frequently more or less +erratic, and are considered as "flighty" by their friends. They need +instruction on the subject of psychic laws and self-control, so that +they may intelligently guard themselves against undesirable influences, +and at the same time cultivate the power of mediumship of the desirable +kind. It has been asserted that "everyone is a medium," and in a way +this is true, for practically every person is more or less sensitive to +spirit influence, and is capable of being developed into an efficient +medium of communication with the spirit world. But it is equally true +that only a certain percentage of persons possess the true spiritual +qualities requisite for the highest phases of true mediumship. That is +to say, but few persons are fitted temperamentally and spiritually for +the higher tasks of mediumship. We think it safe to say, however, that +where a person is filled with a burning desire to become a true medium, +and feels within himself or herself a craving of the soul for +development along these lines, then that person may feel assured that he +or she has within his or her soul the basic qualities required for true +mediumship, and that these may be developed by the proper methods. + + +The Mediumistic Temperament. + +A leading writer on the subject of mediumship has said: "It is a +fundamental proposition that sensitiveness, or the capability of +mediumship, is a faculty common to mankind, differing in degree--as +hearing and sight are common heritages, but keener in some individuals +than in others; or, under certain conditions, it may disappear." What +is called "the mediumistic temperament" is frequently marked +self-consciousness and shrinking from public criticism, and a diffidence +which causes the person to wish to be out of the range of the +observation of strangers and those not sympathetic to them; on the other +hand, however, there are other forms of the "mediumship temperament" +which is marked by a nervous, almost hysterical, self assertiveness and +desire for public notice and attention. Persons of either of these +phases of this temperament, however, have the common quality of being +extremely sensitive to sneers and slights, adverse criticism and +oppositions, while ridicule drives them almost beside themselves. +Likewise they are nearly always found to be enthusiastic and earnest +workers when their interests and sympathies are aroused; as a writer has +said "they are almost invariably emotional, enthusiastic, spontaneous, +and ardent." And, as another writer has said they are usually "generous +and impulsive, hot-headed and independent, close friends with warm +hearts; too sensitive to criticism of an unkind nature, too easily +pleased by praise; without malice, without revengeful thoughts." A +striking feature of this temperament may be summed up in the phrase, +"hungry for sympathy and understanding." + + +Is Mediumship Desirable? + +While it is true that a vast majority of persons possess the mediumistic +power, latent and dormant, and capable of being developed to a greater +or less active power, it is but honest to say that in many cases it is a +grave question whether the person would be justified in undertaking the +hard work, and long time, required to develop himself for the minor +success which would attend his efforts. As a writer has said: "Does the +prospective result justify the labor involved to bring these powers into +efflorescence? My impression is, that in at least three cases out of +four, the time and labor it would take to develop this latent quality to +its greatest efficacy would be far in excess of its value when so +developed." But, as we have already said, the best indication is found +in the "call" to develop his or her latent powers which the true medium +always experiences. + + +Developing the Natural Power. + +A writer on this subject well says: "Just as a drum or tamborine is +incapable of being made to emit a tithe of what can be produced by means +of a piano or a violin, in the way of music, so the differences in +quality and conditions of the physical organisms, and in the degree of +nervous and psychical sensibility of those who desire mediumship, render +it improbable that any but a small proportion will develop such extreme +susceptibility to spirit influence as will repay them for the time and +self-sacrifice involved in the cultivation of their powers. Further, it +should be borne in mind that while wise spirits are ever ready to +respond to the call of the earnest aspirant for spiritual truth, as wise +spirits they are not likely to devote themselves to the preparation of +an instrument that would be inefficient for their purpose. The nervous +system of the medium, whatever his phase may be, has to be trained to +respond to the will and the psychic force of the controlling spirit, +just as much as the muscles of the musician or artist, and 'practice +makes perfect' in the one case as well in the other. Since mediumship +is a strictly natural qualification, depending upon organic fitness and +susceptibility, it is not a supernatural power or a special 'gift,' +neither does it insure the moral purity nor the intellectual ability of +the medium, any more than musical or artistic capabilities are evidences +of the special intelligence or the high moral tones of their +possessors." + + +Mediumship and Genius. + +The spirits controlling the hand of a celebrated writing medium, once +delivered through him the following message regarding the nature and +development of mediumistic powers: "Mediumship is a development of that +which is, in another sort, genius. Genius, the opened and attentive ear +to spirit guidance and inspiration, shades away into mediumship, the +facile instrument of spirit manifestation. In proportion as the medium +becomes open to influence, directly exercised, is he valuable as a means +whereby direct messages are conveyed. And in proportion as the +individual spirit is lost and merged in the great ocean of spirit, is +the result most direct and serviceable. It is when the passive spirit is +content to allow us to use the corporeal instrument, as it does when +itself operates, that we gain satisfactory results. That can only be +when a condition of perfect passivity, as far removed from scepticism as +from credulity, has been secured. This opening of the spiritual being to +spiritual influences is what you call mediumship. The true and valuable +gifts are purely spiritual and must be used for spiritual purposes; not +for gain, or for satisfying curiosity, or for base or unworthy ends." + + +Spontaneous Mediumship. + +What may be called "spontaneous mediumship" is experienced by many +persons not claiming mediumistic powers, and not understanding the +nature of the phenomena manifesting to and through themselves. Such +persons at times are conscious of the presence of spirit friends, and +may even catch glimpses of them either in the form of a mental image +impressed upon their minds by the spirit friends, or else by a more or +less clear partial materialization. Sometimes raps manifest themselves +in their vicinity, and tables and light articles of furniture may +manifest movement at their touch or approach. Such persons, not +understanding the laws of spirit manifestation, are frequently greatly +distressed, or even frightened, by such manifestations; and in not a few +cases they experience considerable annoyance and grief by reason of the +attitude of their friends who are apt to consider them "queer," or +"spooky," and therefore to be avoided. Moreover, in the case of the +physical manifestations such as the movements of tables, furniture, +etc., and the production of raps, these persons are frequently accused +of deliberate fraud in the production of such phenomena, whereas as a +matter of fact they, themselves, are quite in the dark as to the cause +and nature of the phenomena in question. It is obvious that the placing +of the right information in the hands of such persons, and their +instruction in the laws and principles of mediumship would be a blessing +to them. + + +Mediumistic Flashes. + +A writer has the following to say concerning this class of mediumistic +persons: "Those persons who are naturally sensitive sometimes +experience strange and sudden impulses. Thoughts come to them 'in a +flash,' so to speak. They say things spontaneously which they had not +intended to say--the words seem to burst from them and 'say themselves.' +Others have equally sudden and fugitive clairvoyant experiences; they +see spirits where they least expect, and when they are absorbed in +something else; but when they strongly desire to 'see' or to receive +guidance, they get nothing. This state of affairs, in all probability, +is due to the fact that their susceptibility is not sufficiently +developed; their psychical impressibility can only be reached and acted +upon under specially favorable conditions, which are disturbed and +dissipated when the ordinary intellectual self is aroused. + + +Systematic Development. + +"The remedy will be found in the systematic cultivation of interior +repose and confidence. The psychic must learn to regard it as a +perfectly natural experience that the spiritual states and positive +thoughts of excarnate people should impinge upon his spiritual sphere, +and while 'attentive to the holy vision,' should calmly accept the fact +and maintain the attitude or response; not anxiously nor demandingly, +but thankfully enjoying the spiritual communion and illumination thus +afforded to him. It is only natural that many people should desire to +become mediums, and that they should wish to ascertain what constitutes +mediumship, and what is required to secure its development. But those +who express these desires should remember that in all probabilities +months, if not years, of patient development have been necessary for the +success and efficiency of those celebrated mediums whom they admire and +probably envy." But, as we have said before, if the "call" to mediumship +be felt, then it may be heeded; though the person must be prepared to +pay the price of toil and work, patience and perseverance, required to +attain the mountain top of mediumship. + + +The Development Circle. + +As we have repeatedly stated in the foregoing pages, the actual spirit +circle is the best possible means of developing the latent powers of +mediumship, and the simplest, readiest, and most effective method of +discovering the presence of such latent powers in the individual. As a +leading medium has told us, it is "the primary school for the study of +spiritual facts, and for the training of mediums." The "spirit circle," +as most of you know, is a company of harmonious, earnest, sympathetic +persons joining their psychic powers for the purpose of aiding the +medium to establish the lines of psychic communication between the earth +plane and the planes of the spiritual world. It must here be stated that +by "development" we do not mean the cultivation of the powers of the +spirits, but rather the training and unfoldment of the powers of the +medium to receive and transmit the power exercised by the spirit +controls. + + +The Aspirational Attitude. + +To those who purpose to develop their latent mediumistic powers by and +through the development circle, we would say that it is of the highest +importance that they should cultivate a trustful, hopeful mental +attitude, and a willingness to open themselves to the inflow of the +spiritual power of their friends of the spiritual planes. As a writer +has said, they should "make some mental preparation, such as eliminating +from their minds all disturbing or irritating thoughts, and by striving +to consciously realize union of purpose with those who may have +previously made their presence known or indicated their intention to +help in the work of the development of their mediumistic powers, by +mentally requesting that the spiritual ties may be strengthened. Even +where there has not been any clear indication of the presence of spirit +helpers, a generally aspirational and receptive attitude of mind will do +much towards providing favorable conditions." + + +Natural Unfoldment. + +Again, the person wishing to develop his latent mediumistic powers must +exercise patience and perseverance, and must not insist upon a premature +attempt at revelation on the part of the spirits. The process of the +unfoldment of the mediumistic powers should be akin to that of the +unfoldment of the bud of the flower, that is to say, it must be gradual, +natural, and unforced. The writer above mentioned, says on this point: +"Too many people, instead of waiting until the spirits were ready to +communicate with them, have pressed for 'tests' before the connections +were properly made. They have complicated matters by their eager +questionings, and have worried the operators until everything went +wrong; and then, because the answers were incorrect, inconsequent and +misleading, or persistently negative, they declared that the spirit was +a deceiver, evil, or foolish, and, while having only themselves to +blame, gave up the sittings in disgust, whereas, had they been less +impetuous, less opinionated, less prejudiced, they would in all +probability have eventually obtained satisfactory proofs of the presence +of their spirit loved ones." + + +Persistent Watchful Waiting. + +Some persons are so disappointed because they have not obtained results +after two or three sittings that they give up further efforts. It would +perhaps amaze such persons to know that many of the world's most +celebrated mediums have, in the beginning of their development circle +work, sat for several weeks, or even several months, at frequent +intervals, without obtaining more than the most meagre results; but they +afterwards developed the most marvelous power. An extreme case is cited +in the history of spiritualism, in which a couple sat night after night +for six months, without missing a sitting and without being rewarded by +a single physical result; but after this tedious and discouraging wait, +all at once, as it were, the spirits secured the most perfect kind of +communication through them, and difficult table tippings and levitation, +convincing raps, messages, writings, and finally materializations +follows, until their fame spread all over the world of spiritualism. + + +Building Lines of Communication. + +Just how long it will require to obtain convincing results at the +development circle is a matter largely dependent upon certain +conditions. Much, of course, depends upon the faculty of the medium to +adjust and harmonize himself with the spirits, so as to furnish a "clear +wire" for them to operate over. Again, much depends upon the character +of the persons constituting the circle. A circle composed of +harmonious, helpful persons will do much to hasten the coming of the +manifestation, whereas one composed of inharmonious, sceptical, +impatient, and materialistic persons will do much to retard the progress +and development of the mediumistic powers. + + +Developing Concentration. + +The following advice on this particular subject will be found helpful to +those contemplating the formation of development circles, and the +unfoldment of their latent powers of mediumship; it is from the pen of +an earnest student of this subject, and one who is himself a competent +medium. This person says: "One of the most important prerequisites for +success in the development of mediumship along spiritual lines is the +cultivation of the power of concentration. In the early days of the +movement the would-be medium was advised to be 'passive,' and passivity +was often construed into self-effacement. We are now learning to +distinguish between receptivity and docility, between apathy and +aspiration. A medium is not, and should not be willing to become a mere +irresponsible tool. For intelligent and beneficial association with, and +inspiration from, the people of the higher life, a certain degree of +abstraction is necessary. To cut one's self off from ordinary +conditions, to retire into the sanctuary of one's own inner +consciousness, to 'enter the silence' as it is sometimes called, is +helpful training for the preparation of conditions favorable for the +manifestation of spirit-power. The Quakers were true spiritualists in +this sense, and evidently realized the need for the concentration of the +soul's forces and their withdrawal from the outer plane, preparatory to +the descent of the spiritual influence that moved them to speak. + + +The Call for Illumination. + +"The sincere supplication for illumination and guidance is never in +vain. The spirit breathes a serener air, and is calmed, strengthened, +and comforted by the subsequent reaction. It is harmonized thereby, and +thus becomes accordant to the psychic forces which, like the ocean's +tides, ebb and flow throughout the universe, and bathe every soul that +lies open to their vivifying and quickening influence. Still more, there +are those who dwell in the Light, whose thoughts and love go out to all +such as truly call upon God; and these, the ministering messenger +spirits, often pour their libations of sympathy into the sad hearts of +the sorrowful ones on earth, even though they remain unknown and their +interposition is unrecognized by those to whom they have given their +loving and helpful thoughts. + + +The Jacob's Ladder of Communion. + +"By the earnest study of the conditions requisite for the development of +body, mind, and psychic sense, the intelligent medium will endeavor to +meet the friends who inspire him at least half way on the Jacob's ladder +of communion, and to enter into reciprocal and conscious fellowship with +them on the thought plane, so that their inspirations may freely flow +through his instrumentality to others, unobstructed by his personality. +Classes for the development of mediumship along these lines are very +much needed; classes in which the members are expected to take an +active part, not merely to sit and sit, and let the spirits do all the +work, but by systematic preparation and spiritual aspiration and +cultivated receptivity prepare themselves to become lucid and capable +instruments for the transmission of information and helpful influences +from the other side. + + +The Attainment of Excellence. + +"There is but one course of procedure for the successful attainment of +excellence in any field of labor or thought, and that is by study and +training, by observation, by persevering application and determined +effort, by readiness to learn, and responsiveness to every influence +which will help to smooth the pathway to the desired success. The +intelligent medium who follows this course will not go blindly on +groping in the obscurity of the psychic realm, and becoming the tool for +unseen and unknown agents, but he will unfold his powers, and by +co-operating with them will learn to know and trust his preceptors, +until he may possibly become as a spirit among spirits, the conscious +possessor of such knowledge regarding his own spiritual nature and +powers that he will be a ready instrument in the hands of enlightened +spirit people, with whom he can knowingly work for human good." + + +What a Development Circle Is. + +Now then, with the above advice and admonitions in mind, the persons who +desire to develop and unfold their mediumistic powers will do well to +take the necessary steps to form a development circle. The "circle" it +must be remembered, is not merely a crowd of persons gathered together +for the purpose of witnessing spiritualistic manifestations or +phenomena. Instead, it is a gathering of persons who desire to +co-operate in establishing relations with the world of spirits, and to +receive communications therefrom. In the case of the development circle, +the purpose is to demonstrate that well established spiritualistic +principle that the mediumistic faculty in all of its forms is best +developed and unfolded, cultivated and strengthened, by an actual +sitting in the circle, in such a way as to perfect and spiritualize the +magnetism of the sitters by their mutual action on each other, and by +the influence and power of the spirits employing such magnetic and +psychic forces so furnished them by the circle of harmonious sitters. +Or, as a writer has well expressed it: "The purpose for which a spirit +circle is held is that by the blending of the aura, psychic force, or +magnetic emanations of the sitters, the attention of disembodied spirits +may be attracted and a battery be formed by means of which they can +communicate with the circle. The focalization of this force rests with +the unseen operator, and if they are skilled in the 'modus operana,' +they know where, how, and in what way to use it to the best advantage." + + +Forming the Development Circle. + +The circle should be composed of not less than four persons, and not +more than twelve. It is well to have an equal number of persons of each +sex, if this be possible; if not possible to obtain an equality of the +sexes, the effort should be made to come as near to that equality as is +possible. The members of the circle should seat themselves around a +table, and as nearly as is possible the sexes should be alternated in +this grouping, that is to say, a man should sit next to a woman, and so +on. It will be found well to have the same persons regularly attend the +circles, so far as is possible. Likewise, it will be found advantageous +to always use the same table, and to hold the circle in the same +room--but these things are not absolutely essential, and very good +results may often be obtained by having the members of the circle gather +at the different homes of its respective members. While cheerfulness is +well on the part of the sitters, there should be no indulgence in levity +and joking during the sitting. The room should be comfortably warmed and +lighted in the ordinary way. + + +The Sitters in the Circle. + +The sitters will do well to occupy their same places at each sitting, +unless the spirits indicate otherwise. The medium, or in the absence of +a recognized medium the most sensitive person in the circle, should sit +in the circle at a place mentally recognized as the "head of the table," +even though the table be circular in form. It will be well for the +sitters to hold each others' hands at the beginning of the circle, in +order to generate the necessary magnetism. But after the circle is +actually formed, the sitters should place their hands on the top of the +table, close to its edge; the small fingers of the hands of each sitter +touching those of the sitter on either side of him--in this way there is +a psychic and magnetic battery formed of the sitters, providing perfect +connection is maintained. + + +The Spirit Communication Code. + +At the beginning, the leader should plainly announce the signalling +conditions, so as to avoid confusion on the part of the sitters and the +visiting spirits (for there are several codes in use, and confusion +sometimes occurs). The most general used and approved code is as +follows: "THREE indicates Yes; ONE indicates No; TWO indicates +'doubtful'; FOUR indicates 'don't know'; and FIVE indicates 'call the +alphabet.'" The numbers refer to the number of raps or table-tilts, +etc., given by the spirits in answer to questions asked them. When the +alphabet is called for, some one of the circle slowly calls out each +letter of the alphabet, in regular order, until a rap or table-tilt +indicate that the right letter has been indicated; this letter should +then be written down, and the alphabet again called, until the next +letter is indicated; and so on until the message is completed. For +instance, the name "John" would be spelt out as J-O-H-N, four callings +of the alphabet being necessary to obtain the same. + + +The Matter of Time Conditions. + +The time at which the seances are held is not in itself important, but +it will be found best to fix such time at such an hour that will be most +convenient for the sitters, and at which their minds will not be +distracted by thoughts that they should return home, or should be +attending to certain household or business duties, etc. The seances +should be held not oftener than, say, twice a week, or at the most three +times a week. Each seance should be continued for about an hour or a +little over--certainly not over two hours at a time. The sitters should +be punctual in attendance, so that no time may be lost or wasted. The +idea should be that the spirit friends are awaiting your coming to +fulfill your engagement with them, and one should be as careful to keep +such an engagement as he would were the engagement with his most valued +friend or esteemed acquaintance. Regularity in attendance is also +important, as it is important that so far as possible the same general +conditions be maintained at each and every seance. The seance should be +started at the same hour on each occasion, at least so far as is +possible, so as to preserve the same time rhythm. + + +Opening of the Seance. + +It will be well to open the seance with a few moments of earnest, silent +meditation--a few moments of dwelling "in the silence," as some have +well called it; and these moments should be observed in a religious and +devotional state of mind, all frivolity and flippancy being carefully +avoided. If some present feel moved to prayer, then by all means let the +prayer be made, for there can scarcely be a more fitting occasion for +reverent prayer than a properly conducted seance. A few moments of +hymn-singing may also be found advantageous in the direction of +producing the devotional state of mind on the part of the sitters. The +sitters should preserve a solemn frame of mind and reverent general +demeanor during the seance--perhaps the best model is that of an old +time Quaker Meeting in which the silent devout spiritual feeling was so +plainly manifest that it could almost be felt physically. Patience is +necessary in conducting a seance, and perseverance is essential. The +manifestations cannot be unduly forced, and there is often required a +great deal of psychical adjustment before the lines of the spiritual +communication between the two great planes of life are fully +established. + + +Developing a Medium. + +If the circle be one devoted chiefly to the development of mediumistic +powers in some one of its members, then it will perhaps be best to have +only that particular medium present. The remainder of the sitters should +be highly sympathetic toward the developing medium, and should assume +the mental attitude of help and aid toward him. While the early results +of such a circle may not be so interesting as those at which a fully +developed medium is present, nevertheless the gradual unfoldment of the +powers of the medium will be found highly interesting, and the gradual +evolution of the character of the phenomena produced will be a liberal +education in itself. In case that in the circle there are no particular +persons regarded as being mediums, and where there is a general desire +to develop mediumistic powers among many or all of the sitters, there +must be carefully avoided anything approaching a rivalry between the +members of the circle; and at the same time a strong desire and perfect +willingness for the spirit power to manifest through whomsoever it may +prefer, without regard to the personal ambitions of the individual +sitters. Most certainly there must be no spirit of "competition" among +the sitters in the circle. + + +The Personnel of the Circle. + +The personal composition of the spiritualistic circle is a very +important matter, and those entering into circle work should pay +careful attention to the personal and psychical character of those +composing the circle; and it may be added here that such work requires +very nice powers of discrimination, and a great degree of tact, in order +to preserve the proper character of the circle, and at the same time to +avoid wounding the pride of those who are to be rejected. Regarding the +character of those composing the circle, the following statement of a +practical medium will be found of importance. "There are some people who +are so sensitive that they should not sit in circles, because they are +liable to become charged with the psychic emanations from, and dominated +by the expectancy of, the sitters, but who are not influenced by spirit +power to any great extent. Or probably there may exist 'cross +magnetism,' that is to say the inharmonious magnetism of different +members who are antagonistic to each other. Some sitters may be +sarcastic, merely curious, or selfish, or mercenary, or not over clean, +sober or scrupulous, and all such surroundings act and react upon the +highly sensitive organization of the undeveloped medium, and, above all, +provide conditions favorable for the manifestations of mischievous or +malicious spirits, unless the medium is sufficiently developed, or is +protected by wise spirits powerful enough to resist or control such +influences. Like attracts like, as a general rule; but there are +exceptions to this, as to most rules, as, for instance, where +unfortunate or unhappy spirits are permitted to manifest, and are even +brought to the seance by other and more experienced spirit people, so +that they may be helped. The influence of the sitters in moulding the +conditions is too little realized. If they introduce an atmosphere of +suspicion, doubt, distrust, or detraction, they break the continuity of +the flow of psychic energy that has to be employed. By thus severing the +current and dissipating the power, they mar the conditions essential to +success; and, as all such disturbances of necessity center upon and +injuriously affect the sensitive medium, they render soul-satisfying and +uplifting communion impossible. To all sitters, we would say, 'You get +to a very great extent what you make conditions for, therefore open the +doors of the heavens by love and purity.'" + + +Changing the Sitters. + +Changes in the membership of a circle is sometimes found to be quite +beneficial. If a circle meets night after night with the same +membership, but without obtaining any perceptible results, then it may +be well to consider the desirability of adding some new elements to the +membership in the hope of improving the conditions. Sometimes the +addition of a new sitter of the right physical and psychical temperament +works a most remarkable improvement, and in many of such cases +noteworthy phenomena are then produced almost from the time of the +change. We have seen circles in which the condition of non-success was +changed in a few moments to one of great and marked success by the +introduction of a new element among the sitters. + + +Adding a Medium. + +Sometimes there may result certain physical phenomena such as table +tippings and movements of furniture, in cases in which there is a +sufficient amount of psychic force generated among the sitters; but in +such cases there may be an absolute failure to produce some of the +higher forms of mediumistic phenomena, such as, for instance, clear +spirit messages by raps or otherwise, the failure being caused by the +fact that the circle did not include in its membership any person of +sufficiently developed mediumistic powers to be considered a "medium." +In such cases the introduction into the circle of a person possessing +fairly developed mediumistic powers of the higher order may change the +condition of affairs at once, and almost immediately the higher +manifestations may present themselves. In such cases the soil is richly +fertilized and highly cultivated, and all that has been lacking is the +strong, vigorous seed of true mediumship. In such cases when a true +medium is discovered by means of his or her introduction into the circle +(for such discovery is often made in this way), it may be well for the +circle afterwards to devote itself to the development of that particular +medium. And it must not be forgotten that such development of the +particular medium frequently also results in the development of the +other members sitting in the circle. + + +Reasons for Changes. + +In cases in which the spirits suggest changes in the order of sitting of +the members of the circle, or suggest other changes in the personnel of +the circle, such suggestions should be heeded, and those who are asked +to withdraw from the table should not feel hurt or offended, for there +is usually nothing personal in the matter, and no personal reflection +intended by the spirits; the whole matter is one connected with +psychical or magnetic requirements, and all should so accept it. A +writer on this subject has well said: "If you are requested, either by +the controlling intelligence or by the manager of the circle, to take +another place, or even if your room is desired for some unknown cause, +do not get angry and create a disturbance, but get with those with whom +you are in spiritual harmony and try it again. All who have succeeded +have passed through great trials and failures, and when success is +gained, think of what you have gained. A knowledge of immortality, +possibly, or you have assisted in producing an instrument through which +proofs of immortality may be given." + + +Psychic Attunement. + +One of the most common faults of the sitters at a circle is to become +unduly impatient, and to try to force matters to a clear manifestation +of phenomena almost from the moment of the start. This is all wrong, and +is frequently the cause of many failures to obtain the higher phases of +mediumistic phenomena. Sitters should remember this important point, +i.e., that the first requisite of the circle should be to secure perfect +and free communication and flow of spiritual power--after this the more +elaborate phases of phenomena may be obtained with comparative ease. One +should hold in mind the illustration of a great wireless telegraph +system, in which the sending and receiving instruments have not as yet +been placed in perfect attunement. In such a case it is of course +necessary for the two respective sets of instruments to be adjusted so +that they may be in perfect attunement with each other; and until this +is accomplished, there can be messages sent or received +properly--certainly none received in this way. If this idea be held in +mind, their circle will probably secure the psychic attunement in a much +shorter time than otherwise. + + +Pre-Test Manifestations. + +Do not be in too much of a hurry to obtain "test" messages. Let the +communications flow on in a somewhat rambling manner at first, until the +lines of communication are fully and firmly established, and then you +may begin to think about asking test questions of the spirits in order +to establish their identity. A writer says on this point: "Should table +movements occur, or raps be heard, let them go on for a little. Do not +ask test questions just yet. Request repetitions, or ask for them to be +clearer or louder, so that they may be sharp and decisive. You may also +ask for a certain number of movements or raps. After that, you may +proceed to ask questions as to whether the circle is sitting in the best +arrangement for success. If changes are desired, these should be made as +suggested. It may happen that one or more of the sitters may be +requested to change places, or to withdraw from the table altogether. In +such a case the sitter should not take umbrage for it merely means that +their psychical conditions do not blend with those of the rest of the +circle." + + +Premature Tests. + +Regarding the matter of premature tests, or unreasonable demands, the +same writer further says: "Remember that the first requisite is to +establish the channel of communication; and all personal questions as to +who and what the spirit is should be reserved until the initial +difficulties are overcome. It is at first most probable that the spirit +operators will not be fully aware just what effect they are producing, +and the mind of the medium may not as yet be sufficiently passive, in +fact it may be in a sort of state of protest against being acted upon in +this particular way; accordingly, it is extremely unwise to attempt to +obtain responses to test questions or to secure evidences of the +identity of the spirit under these imperfect conditions. Many mediums +and inquirers have been deterred from further development or +investigation because such questions have been prematurely put and the +answers pressed for, with the result that confusing and contradictory +responses were given, and the conclusion was hastily drawn that it was +all fraud, delusion, of the devil." + + +Forcing Tests. + +Another writer has said on this point: "I then, in my anxiety, made a +mistake which anxious inquirers sometimes make. I wanted more--I pressed +for another test, forgetting the difficulties of mediumship, and the +supreme effort which must have been made to give me what I had obtained. +And this resulted in failure after remarkable tests had been given." +Another writer, commenting upon the last quoted statement, says: "This +is exactly how mediums are used; they give test after test, not to +satisfy, but only to produce the desire for more. Then when the power is +weakened, comes the inability--or 'fraud,' as the imperfection in +mediumship is often called. This will be the case until they can have +the only condition which is suitable for spiritual communion--passive +trust and confidence. Real tests cannot come when sought with +materialistic conditions. The tests come unsought, unasked for." + + +Spirit Directions. + +Another point which should be borne in mind by the sitters in the circle +is that the spirits should be consulted as to just what they wish to +manifest at the seance. They should be asked to state plainly just what +order of phenomena they desire to manifest and demonstrate, and just +what they wish the circle to do in order to create the best conditions +for the manifestation. And it will be found advisable to heed the wishes +and instructions of the spirits in such cases, and to conform as far as +possible with the same. In this way the intelligent co-operation of +spirits and the circle may be obtained, and the most desirable results +be obtained. However, there is a limit to this acceptance and course, +and in no case should the limits of reasonableness be exceeded in the +matter. As a writer has well said: "It may happen that the conditions +asked for by the communicating intelligence may seem to be ludicrous or +impracticable; and in such case representations to that effect should be +made to the spirit, and if such instructions are persisted in, except +where, through long association, confidence is felt in the spirit, or +very clear evidence of knowledge has been manifested, the medium and +sitters, exercising their own reasoning powers, should quietly and +firmly decline to do what is asked of them, and some other course should +be suggested. We do not advise either medium or sitters to blindly +accept or follow what is given to or through them. Reason should ever +reign, but even reason will show that in experimental work it is +sometimes advisable to tentatively adopt and follow some course that may +not, at first sight, appear quite reasonable." + + +Questioning the Spirits. + +After a satisfactory arrangement of the sitters is obtained, and the +table tiltings or rappings have assumed a clear, definite character, +then the sitters may proceed to ascertain the identity of the spirit +seeking to communicate to the circle; or else to ascertain whether the +spirit wishes to deliver a message directed specially to some particular +one of the sitters. In the latter case, the person indicated should +prepare to question the spirit direct, either verbally or else silently +and mentally. In either case the question should be stated clearly and +to the point, so that the spirit may give a simple definite answer. +Questions which may be answered by a simple "Yes" or "No" are of course +preferable. If the spirit agrees to move the table, or else produce +raps, as the alphabet is called over letter by letter, the communication +and answers may of course be given in much fuller detail. In such case +the spirit may be called on to spell out its name, and to designate its +relationship to any of the sitters; or even to spell out a complete +message. In addressing the spirit one should pursue the same general +course employed in addressing questions to a friend in the flesh; and +care should be taken to address the spirit politely and in a kindly +tone. Some spirits are very sensitive concerning these details, and will +resent any impoliteness or discourtesy, or flippancy from strangers. + + +Substance and Shadow. + +Moreover, the earnest investigator of spiritualistic phenomena must +always bear in mind that the mere production of mediumistic phenomena of +the physical phase is not the real object of the investigation and +sittings. These things, interesting as they may be in themselves, should +be regarded as merely the incidents of the intelligent communication and +reception of messages from the inhabitants of the higher planes of life +and existence. The spiritualistic circle should be more than a mere +"wonder shop" in which are exhibited strange and unusual physical +phenomena; rather should it be regarded as the receiving end of the +wireless system over which we may and do receive valuable communications +from those who have passed on before us. + +As a writer has said: "It is not so much that the table moves with or +without contact, or that strange rappings are heard, that is of +paramount importance, but that by these means of communication actual +and intelligent communication can be obtained and maintained with +so-called dead people; and evidences of spirit identity, as well as +loving and cheering messages may be obtained in that way from loved ones +who were supposed to be gone forever. This is the important point to be +established beyond all peradventure." + + + + +PART IX + +MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA + + +Some students of this book who have noted in the foregoing pages certain +references to the conduct of the sitters in the circle may ask +themselves the question: "Why are the SITTERS so important, when the +power is really exerted by the spirits through the MEDIUM?" In fact, +such questions, often uttered in the spirit of adverse criticism, are +frequently propounded by sceptics to spiritualists, and it is well that +the answer should be correctly given. As a matter of fact the +understanding of such answer will mean the possession of some important +facts concerning the phenomena of mediumship, and without which the +investigator will possibly wander far astray from the main road of truth +concerning such phenomena. + + +The Part Played by the Sitters. + +All of the best authorities on the subject of spiritualism are +practically agreed concerning the important part played by the sitters +in the circle in all manifestations of spirit power. As J. J. Morse +says: "There are three factors concerned in mediumship: (1) the spirit +controlling; (2) the mental atmosphere of the medium controlled; and (3) +the mental atmosphere of the people surrounding the medium." And as A. +Morton has said: "The requirements for honesty on the part of mediums +are equally binding upon investigators; they must have honesty of +purpose if they expect to attract honest spirits." + + +Result of Bad Sitters. + +And Wallis has said: "Although the spirits may be intensely anxious to +demonstrate their power, they are sometimes repelled from those whom +they seek to approach by the bristling and discordant conditions of +mind that prevail among the sitters, who disperse with a feeling of +dissatisfaction and disappointment. If the sitters only knew it, the +so-called failure was directly traceable to the destructive +thought-atmosphere with which they surround themselves and the medium. +Too frequently they do not prepare themselves for 'the hour's +communion with the dead,' and their mental attitude is anything but +conductive to success. They do not put away the thronging thoughts, +anxieties, and worries of their busy lives, but carry them right into +the seance chamber, yet expect good spiritual results. Both sitter and +medium may very easily destroy the indispensable conditions of +spirit-manifestation, and the medium's honesty, not his want of +growth, or of knowledge, is called in question by the investigator who +knows, and perhaps cares, nothing for the occult laws he has violated, +not obeyed." + + +Mental Atmosphere of the Medium. + +Likewise, it must not be forgotten that an important factor in the +production of mediumistic phenomena is that which Morse, in the above +quotation, has called "the mental atmosphere of the medium controlled." +In many cases the spirit powers are present and ready to manifest +freely, and the mental atmosphere of the sitters is likewise desirable +and sympathetic, but still the manifestations are but faint, irregular, +and generally unsatisfying--the weak link of the chain being found in +the mental state of the medium, and consequently in the mental +atmosphere arising from the same. Such undesirable mental states and +atmospheres may be said to arise principally from two general causes, as +follows: (1) Desire on the part of the medium to produce sensational or +brilliant results, and (2) Doubt on the part of the medium concerning +the genuineness and validity of the communications. Let us consider each +of these in further detail. + + +The Mediumistic Mind. + +If the medium is filled with the idea or notion of producing brilliant +or sensational results, he will in all probability so disturb the +placidity of the receiving surface of his mind that the latter will fail +to register or record the impressions being made upon it by the spirit +vibrations. It is similar to the case of a placid bosom of a deep lake +which, normally, will reflect clearly and distinctly the images of the +surrounding scenery cast upon it from the light waves; but which, if +disturbed by strong breezes, will exhibit merely a distorted, disturbed, +incomplete, and untrue reflection of the surrounding scenery cast upon +its surface. A strong desire of the kind mentioned will tend to agitate +and disturb the normal placid condition of the mental reflecting surface +of the mediumistic mind. + + +Mediumistic "Stage Fright." + +In the same way the placid reflecting surface of the mediumistic mind +may become disturbed by the presence of fear, doubt, and distrust in the +mind of the medium. It may at first seem strange that the medium should +doubt the manifestations being made through his mentality, provided that +he be honest and genuine. But the answer and explanation is very simple. +The medium (particularly the young medium) may become panic-stricken by +the thought that "perhaps this is merely the result of my own +imagination or fancy, instead of spirit power," and the result will be +that he will begin to halt and stumble, stammer and stutter, instead of +allowing the message to flow through him uninterrupted. This is +particularly true when the message is of the nature of a test of +identity, and where the vocal organs of the medium are being employed in +the manifestation. It occurs far more frequently than the public +suppose, that the medium is stricken by stage-fright or the panic of +fear, arising from the causes above given, i.e. the sudden fear that he +is allowing his fanciful imagination to run away with him instead of his +being under genuine control. + + +The Psychic Telephone System. + +The medium should ever strive to guard against this harmful mental +state, and should open himself completely to the spirit influence, +casting aside all fear and doubt, and placing all responsibility upon +the controlling spirit or band of helpers. The medium should remember +that he is merely the "medium" or psychic telephone system, and is not +an active party to the process of spirit communication. He should, +therefore, never either unduly strive to please, nor be fearful or +distrustful concerning the validity of the manifestation being made +through him. Let the spirits attend to their end of the line, and the +sitters to the other end--the medium is on neither end of the line, but +is the line itself. + + +Interrupted Communications. + +It should not be forgotten, in this connection, that the spirits have +their own difficulties to contend with. In the current slang phrase, +they "have troubles of their own" to overcome in the production of +mediumistic phenomena. Not only does the spirit wishing to communicate +have to draw sufficient psychic power from the medium and the sitters, +not only has he to scientifically adjust the apparatus at the sending +end of the psychic telephonic line, but he has also to be sure that he +is actually communicating the message so that it may be received by the +sitters. In such cases the spirit is placed in a position similar to +that of a person at one end of a telephone line, who after had an answer +to his opening "Hello!" talks away, thinking that the person at the +other end is hearing every word he utters, perfectly unconscious that +the communication has been interrupted from some cause or other common +to telephone lines. How often do we, in our telephone conversations, +interrupt our flow of talk to anxiously inquire, "Are you still there?" +or "Do you hear me?" + + +Some Difficulties of the Spirits. + +A writer on the subject has well said regarding this difficulty on the +part of the communicating spirit: "Spirits have many difficulties to +overcome." On one occasion, a medium felt the influence of an arisen +friend very strongly. It was accompanied by an intense desire to speak, +and yet the medium was unable to give utterance to that which the spirit +wished to have said. In answer to an inquiry that was subsequently made +as to why the spirit had been unable to communicate with his dear ones, +one of the familiar controls of the medium explained that he thought +that he had actually spoken. His feeling of nearness to them was so +vivid, and his wish to express himself through the lips of the medium +had been so intense, that it was only after he had ceased his efforts to +control that he realized that he had only THOUGHT and INTENDED, but had +not succeeded in compelling the sensitive to utter his message. This +will perhaps explain why mediums sometimes rise to their feet and act as +if they were about to speak, but get no further--they do not receive the +impression, or the right mental impulse; they feel as if they COULD +speak and yet they have nothing to say. At such times a few words of +sympathy and inquiry from the conductor of the circle may assist the +control to realize the situation and succeed in his endeavors to +communicate. + + +Difficulties Overcome. + +"Even on this side, when we send telegraphic messages or use the +telephone, mistakes and misunderstandings are by no means uncommon +occurrences, and our letters sometimes create an impression in the mind +of the reader which we did not intend to convey. Is it any wonder, then, +that messages from the other side are imperfectly impressed upon, and +incorrectly rendered by, the medium? Most persons who have attempted to +transfer thoughts to mesmerized sensitives have realized that general +ideas can be transmitted much more easily than names, dates, or specific +words can be impressed upon or expressed by the subject. The wonder is, +not that so few names, ages, and special details are given by spirits to +and through mediums, but that, considering all the attendant +circumstances, so MANY 'test' messages are continually being given, both +privately and in public." + + +The Psychic Triangle. + +In considering the question of the requisites of the mediumistic circle, +the student should remember always that there is A PSYCHIC TRIANGLE in +all such circles, viz., a triangle of which the spirit constitutes one +side, the medium a second side, and the sitters a third side. And it is +essential that a harmony and sympathy between all three sides of the +triangle should be preserved and maintained. Therefore, sitters at the +circle should endeavor to do their part in producing and maintaining +such harmony with both the medium, the spirits, and finally WITH EACH +OTHER--and this last is not the least, by any means. Unless there be at +least a very fair degree of harmony between the several members +constituting the circle, there will be something important lacking in +their harmony of the circle as a whole toward the other two sides of the +psychical triangle. + + +Harmonious Relationship. + +The sitters composing the circle should always remember that mutual +harmony is a most important factor contributing to the success of the +manifestations sought to be secured. Accordingly, each sitter should +strive to bring himself or herself into a sympathetic and harmonious +relationship with each and every other sitter, so far as is possible. To +accomplish this result the sitters should endeavor, so far as is +possible, to lay aside their respective prejudices, jealousies, and +differences of opinion. These incidents of their personality should be +left, together with their hats and outer wraps, in the outer hall of the +house in which the seance is held. Differences of religion, politics, +race and creed, all should be cast aside at least temporarily, in order +that the greatest amount of harmony should be manifested by the group. A +safe rule to follow is this: seek to find the largest number of points +of mutual agreement, and to set aside all the rest of the items of +personal tastes, customs and habits of feeling and thought. Dwell +together on the plane of common agreement, shutting out the planes of +respective disagreements. In this connection we should state that the +customary attitude of cold reserve, blended and colored by suspicion, +which too often is found between comparative strangers, is far from +being helpful in producing the best conditions for the seance. For the +time being, at least, the sitters should try to remember that they are +all members of one great human family, and united by the bonds of common +origin and nature. + + +The Discordant Note. + +A writer recites an incident in a circle which he once attended, which +so thoroughly illustrates the point just made, that we think it worth +while to reproduce it here. He says: "On one occasion in particular, we +had a remarkable illustration of the detrimental influence of one or two +sitters. It occurred at a seance at which a number of mediums were +present, and, under ordinary circumstances, successful results would +have been practically certain; but this was not an ordinary seance--at +least, not in the opinion of one lady who apparently imagined that she +had been invited to discover fraud, and that the rest of us were +suspicious characters. Up to the moment of her appearance in the circle +we were a happy family of sociable folk, and enjoyed a very pleasant +season of conversational interchange. When, however, the said lady, +accompanied by a friend, joined the company, there was a silence that +could be felt. The social temperature fell rapidly--people visibly +stiffened and became constrained. The two ladies appeared to feel afraid +to speak lest they should say anything that might be used by the +mediums, and spoke in monosyllables. Sitting bolt upright, grim and +silent, they drew up to the table, and when the phenomena began they +displayed no signs of interest. Their 'detective' attitude was so +objectionable that even those who had endeavored to thaw out these +self-constituted Sherlock Holmeses, gave up the attempt, and, in +consequence, what had promised to be a really enjoyable evening, proved +one of the most uncomfortable it has been our lot to experience." + + +Antagonistic Elements. + +Another incident of the kind is related by a writer, as follows: "On one +occasion, when some experiments were being made by a medium, under +control, in the direction of psychometry and clairvoyance, a lady +expressed a desire to be the subject for delineation. After one or two +efforts the medium exclaimed, 'I am very sorry, but for some reason I am +quite unable to get anything from you, or for you.' Shortly afterwards +the lady in question remarked to one of the sitters, 'I knew he would +not be able to give me anything. That is the third medium that I have +knocked out.' The failure to obtain results under such impossible +conditions is a proof of the genuine psychic nature of the powers of the +mediums. If they were pretenders they would succeed in doing something +under any circumstances and in spite of such adverse psychic +conditions." While we are far from holding that the sitters in a circle +should lay aside all ordinary caution and good judgment, and instead to +assume the mental attitude of utter and unquestioning credulity and +acceptance, we do positively declare that the mental state of +preconceived distrust and suspicion is often almost fatal to the +production and demonstration of the highest manifestations of spirit +phenomena. + + +The Open Mind. + +The proper mental state of the scientific investigator of spiritualistic +phenomena is that of "the open mind." The sitters should endeavor to lay +aside all prejudices and preconceived conceptions, and in place thereof +should endeavor to hold a fair, impartial mental attitude--and this +accompanied by a desire to have the manifestations proceed naturally, +freely and fully. The results should be sympathetically awaited and +received, and the judgment of careful reasoning withheld until afterward +when the whole proceedings may be recalled and considered in the light +of cold reason. One has but to consider the extremely sensitive +psychical condition of the mentality of the medium, and the nicely +balanced mental atmosphere of the circle, to realize how easily this +sensitiveness may be affected, and the nice balance be disturbed, by the +projection of strong mental waves of distrust, suspicion, and antagonism +into the atmosphere of the circle. The attitude of the intelligent +scientific investigator should be that of a calm and observant soul. +Such an investigator should have what Sir William Crookes once called "a +mind to let," i.e., a mind from which all prejudices and preconceived +theories and notions have been ejected for the time being, and into +which Truth, from any source, should always be welcomed as a tenant. +Instead of seeking to throw obstacles in the way of the medium, one +should endeavor to assist by mental attitude and demeanor, and by +observance of the necessary conditions, in the production of the spirit +manifestations and in the demonstration of spirit identity. + + +Spirits and the Sense of Humor. + +It is not necessary for the sitters to assume an attitude of +preternatural gravity and solemnity. Instead, they should be natural and +cheerful, though of course not flippant or trifling, or indulging in an +exhibition of the cheap remarks which by so many is mistaken for wit. +The sense of humor, however, need not be thrown aside or discarded, for +as all investigators know many of the spirit visitors have a very highly +developed sense of humor, and sometimes even go so far as to seemingly +endeavor to shock some of the melancholy, over-serious, "prunes and +prism" type of sitters. As a writer well says: "Spirits are human still, +and a good, breezy laugh, a hearty, joyous, kindly sympathetic +disposition, goes a long way to open the avenues by which they can +approach us." Another has said: "Experience has taught that the +spiritual circle should be presided over by 'a pure heart and a strong +head'--to which qualities might well be added a well-ordered development +of the sense of humor, for the absence of humor often tends to make +philosophy grotesquely ill-proportioned." + + +Rhythmic Harmony. + +The manifestation of rhythmic harmony often materially aids in the +generation of psychic power, and the consequent production of +advantageous conditions at the circle. Many circles are opened by having +the several sitters indulge in harmonious rhythmic breathing for a few +minutes--all breathing in unison--in order to produce this condition of +rhythm. Those who have never practiced this unison of rhythmic breathing +will be surprised at the consciousness of psychical harmony which may be +produced in this way among a number of persons gathered together in a +circle. This principle of RHYTHM is what is really involved in the call +of many spirits for singing at the beginning of a seance. In singing +there is a certain unison and rhythm unconsciously observed, and it is +this rather than the air or words of the songs which produces the desire +conditions. A writer states that upon one occasion a manifesting spirit +said: "It isn't NOISE that I want; it's HARMONY! If you cannot sing, you +can at least count out loud, and count altogether--THAT may give us the +right vibrations." That spirit had the right idea, and one which it +would be well for all sitters to remember and put into effect. Vibration +is the secret of all things, and rhythm is the measure and spirit of all +vibrations; therefore, the very HARMONY of a circle may be said to be +rhythmic. There is a great truth involved in these statements, and you +will do well to ponder over them. + + +Retarding Factors. + +It should be almost unnecessary to state that haste, hurry and +impatience are retarding factors in a spiritualistic seance; but, alas, +too many persons seem to be totally unaware of this important fact. We +call your attention to the following remarks concerning this point, the +same having been made by a writer on the subject who himself is a medium +of extended experience. He says: "Impatience and anxiety are +disintegrating mental conditions. People who are all the time looking at +their watches and thinking, 'Oh! I wish they would hurry up.' 'Oh! do be +quick, don't keep us here all night, we shall surely miss our train,' +etc., are disturbers of the peace, and break the conditions which +require harmony and repose. 'We have found out that we cannot hurry +them,' said a lady who had enjoyed much experience in circles; and +consequently, when you are sitting for different phenomena, you need to +have plenty of time and be prepared to sit good humoredly for hours, if +need be, to see it through; and then results are likely to speedily +ensue; whereas the more you try to hurry, the more anxious you become, +the less likelihood is there that you will secure results at all. You +can surely realize that hurry, impatience, anxiety, intense expectancy, +fear and suspicion must of necessity disturb the conditions and prove +inimical to the efforts of the spirit operators to present clear and +convincing demonstrations of their power and identity." + + +Reasonable Demands of Spirits. + +In the above stated instance, and others similar to it, it at first +seems as if the spirits were overparticular, and "finnicky" about the +conditions, but a little careful thought will show you that this is not +the real state of affairs at all. The spirits are not "finnicky," but +are merely desirous of securing the conditions necessary to a successful +manifestation, and all their efforts are bent toward that end. This, and +this alone, is the cause of their so-called "finnickiness." Surely they +are justified in this--would not any and all of us feel the same way if +we were trying to establish communications with another plane, where +such communication largely dependent upon the production and maintenance +of certain conditions? I think so. + + +Harmonious Conditions. + +It is not an easy task to give specific directions for development of +mediumistic power for the guidance of one who is desirous of unfolding +such powers after they have first manifested their presence in him. In +fact, as many of the best authorities on the subject agree, it is +practically impossible to lay out a course of cut-and-dried directions +of this kind. This arises logically from the conditions present in such +cases, and from the special circumstances surrounding the subject of +mediumship. In fact, it may be broadly stated that at the beginning the +medium can do but little in the direction of such development, other +than to present harmonious conditions through which the spirits may be +able to manifest their presence and their power. + + +The Channel of Communication. + +It must be always remembered that the medium is not the active agent in +the production of mediumistic phenomena--he is not called to DO anything +except to passively act as the medium or channel of communication +between the two planes of existence. He is always the intermediary +between the two planes, and is not the active agent on either plane. The +active agents are the spirits on the one plane, and the sitters in the +circle on the other plane. The sitters must supply much of the actual +operative power from the one plane, and the spirits must do all of the +communication from the other plane. The medium serves to connect the two +opposite ends of the psychic telephone system so that the messages may +pass through and over the mediumistic channel, secure and maintain the +best psychic conditions. + + +The Role of the Spirits. + +We have spoken of the part of the work which it is necessary for the +sitters to perform in order to And now we shall have something to say +concerning the part to be played properly by the spirits wishing to +communicate. It must not be supposed for a moment that every spirit is +possessed of the necessary knowledge enabling it to communicate easily +through a medium, or even to develop the medium so that he may become an +efficient channel of communication. Spirits are frequently found to be +sadly deficient in such knowledge and experience, and the development of +the medium as well as the production of satisfactory phenomena, suffer +from this lack. The spirits who seek to use a medium may or may not be +fitted for such task. Many spirits are utterly unable to properly +develop a medium; some fail by reason of their lack of knowledge, and +others fail because of their lack of special aptitude for the task. + + +Differences Among Spirits. + +A writer on this subject well says regarding this particular point: +"Some spirits may lack both knowledge and aptitude; others may have the +knowledge, but yet fail from want of the power to control. They may be +able to affect one mediumistic person and not another. Likewise, they +may be able to use a sensitive medium for one phase of mediumship, and +yet be unable to succeed in any other direction. A spirit may be in such +conditions that he can produce good physical phenomena; he may, however, +try to do so through a sensitive who is fitted only for trance or +clairvoyant mediumship, but who does not possess the quality or psychic +force for sensuous manifestations. A medium who is naturally qualified +for physical demonstrations may persist in desiring trance or +inspirational mediumship, and be determined to become a speaker or +nothing. + + +Disturbing Elements. + +"Frequently at the outset both spirits and sitters are ignorant of their +powers, of the conditions necessary for success, and the association +that exists between them being affectional rather than intellectual or +spiritual, they have to grope their way towards each other. It follows, +therefore, that experiments have to be made on BOTH sides. Sitters and +young mediums often spoil the seances by over-anxiety. There would not +be half so much heard of 'evil spirits' (so-called) if more regard were +paid to the necessity of maintaining a calm, patient, and serene frame +of mind. Some people become excited as soon as phenomena commences; +mediums not infrequently get nervous or timid when they feel that they +are being affected, and, although they desire to be controlled, they are +AFRAID to submit to the influences when they are likely to lose +consciousness. All these are disturbing elements, and naturally +interfere with the flow of the forces that are to be utilized, and +prevent the success that is desired. A spirit without any very definite +purpose, finding himself in the presence of a mediumistic person, may +seek to influence him, and spasmodic actions may result. Unless the +control should soon give evidence of clear thought and definite purpose, +he should be requested, in a kindly and courteous manner, to seek the +assistance of some spirit who understands the methods to be employed, +and induce him to exert his power for the benefit of the medium and the +circle." + + +Impersonation Mediumship. + +One of the most interesting phases of mediumship, and the one perhaps +most sought after by earnest seekers of the truth concerning those who +have passed over to a higher plane of existence, is that commonly known +as "impersonation mediumship," or perhaps "impersonating test +mediumship," in which the vocal organs of the medium are employed by the +communicating spirit in order to speak directly to those in the circle, +or to the visiting friend of the decarnate spirit who comes into the +presence of the medium. Many mediums devote their entire time and +attention to this phase of mediumship, and place themselves at the +service of those on the earth plane who wish to converse directly with +their spirit friends or relatives who have passed on. This is by far the +most satisfying phase of mediumship to those on the earth plane who are +thus enabled to receive communications, and perhaps even direct answers +to specific questions made to them. The most convincing evidences of the +identity of the communicating spirit are also obtained through this +particular form of mediumship. And this affording of comfort to those +still on the earth plane is one of the most satisfying features of +mediumship, and one which will do more than aught else to reconcile the +medium to annoyances and to the personal sacrifices so often made by the +medium. + + +The True Purpose of Mediumship. + +A writer has well given to mediums the following inspiring message +concerning the nature, purpose and aims of their work: "The modes of +spirit manifestation are many, the phases wonderfully varied, but, like +a golden cord running through them all, there is a distinct purpose of +bringing to those on earth the glad tidings and proof positive of +continued conscious personal experience in the life after death. The +process of psychic development is usually slow, and the medium will be +likely to grow disheartened; but by looking back over the ground already +traversed, and by comparing the faint efforts made at the commencement +with the later and fuller indications of spirit power, he should feel +encouraged, and proceed with renewed vigor." + + +Gradual Development. + +The best authorities constantly impress upon young mediums the fact that +they should develop their mediumistic powers to a considerable degree +before they venture to give public seances or exhibitions of their +power. As Dr. Dean Clarke well says: "Novices in mediumship have no +business to assume obligations they are not fully qualified to fulfil. +Let them take the counsel metaphorically given by Jesus, to 'tarry in +Jerusalem till their beards are grown.'" They should by all means wait +until the spirits are strong enough to control and guard them from the +meddlesome interferences of other persons, both those in the flesh and +those out of it. Many spirits will overwork the medium, and the latter +not knowing enough to protect himself will often suffer by reason +thereof. On the other hand, young mediums often yield to the +importunities of friends and other sitters, and will try to oblige and +satisfy them, even often at the expense of their own powers and forces. + + +Public Seances. + +A writer, himself a successful medium, gives the following good advice +to young mediums: "I strongly advise all mediums to wait and serve out +their apprenticeship thoroughly before they undertake to sit for +sceptics or perform public work, either as test, impersonating, +speaking, seeing, or healing mediums; and the best place to secure the +necessary experience, training and unfolding is in the home circle. +After a certain stage has been reached, however, the medium who has been +used for impersonations will in all probability begin to display the +powers of clairvoyance and to receive vivid impressions. Then will come, +or they will be accompanied by, the efforts of the spirits to pass +beyond the purely personal and limited forms of expression associated +with the affectionate messages and greetings, to the consideration and +explanation of the conditions and experiences of life on the other side. +Spirits who can teach and give more sequential and sustained addresses +will in all likelihood assume control, and under such conditions it will +be found necessary to enlarge the circle and introduce fresh sitters. +The clairvoyant, or psychometrist, needs new subjects with whom to +experiment, and the speaking medium requires an audience to listen to +his discourses, so that the next step beyond the small private circle +may well be a semi-public one, or an 'after circle' such as is +frequently held at the close of the public Sunday services in many +towns, at which mediums who have reached this stage are afforded the +opportunities they need. + + +Home Circle Development. + +"Around the family table, where those who are united in affection meet +to hold joyous communion with their spirit friends, where the blended +desire ascends to the spiritual plane, and becomes the potent magnetic +attraction, by which those friends can establish harmonious relations +with the sitters--in such a circle and under such conditions even a weak +degree of mediumistic responsiveness to the outpouring from the spirit +side will become intensified and exalted, until rhythmic vibrations are +established and thought and emotion will readily pass from one to +another, and all will be attuned. The best method of cultivation is to +regard the mediumistic sensitiveness as a natural and desirable quality, +to be evolved by training and experiments, under the direction of the +reason and the conscience. In this manner the tribunal which decides the +conduct of life is ever present, and no matter what influences are +brought to bear on the sensitive he remains steadfast, realizing that +the responsibility for use or abuse rests upon himself." + + +Undue Prolongation of Seances. + +There is a great temptation to young mediums to allow their enthusiasm, +and desire to aid in demonstrating spiritualistic phenomena, to cause +them to prolong their seances far beyond the limits which prudence and +regard for the medium's physical well-being would dictate. There is a +certain stimulation and excitement arising from the manifestation of +phenomena through the medium, and this in itself is helpful rather than +hurtful--a tonic rather than a depressant; but like all other forms of +overindulgence, and excessive yielding to this excitement tends to bring +on a reaction and a swing to the opposite emotional extreme, and the +medium suffers thereby in many cases. There comes a time in all seances +when the high-water mark of psychic power is reached, and this is a good +time for the medium to bring the seance to a close--in fact, experienced +mediums do precisely this very thing at this particular time. But this +point once passed, there is experienced a peculiar weakening and +depressing feeling, this often being accompanied by a physical weariness +and a feeling of chilliness in the extremities, or even a slight chilly +feeling over the whole body. When these feelings are experienced, the +medium should remember that the limit of reason has been passed, and he +should bring matters to a close without further loss of time. +Experienced spirits will usually detect the approach of the reaction +time, and will, themselves, bring the seance to a close, independent of +any action on the part of the medium. But when the spirits are not +experienced, they fail to notice this, or even may become careless about +such things in their desire to communicate to the circle. In the latter +cases, the medium must take care of himself. + + +Good Advice to Young Mediums. + +A mediumistic writer gives the following advice on this subject to young +mediums: "Never forget that your nerve-vital energy is used and expended +in the exercise of your mediumship, and that the supply is limited, +hence the necessity for care and moderation. Too frequent, prolonged, +or discordant seances; inharmonious conditions and sittings, when you +are already jaded and exhausted, are therefore to be avoided. If you +make excessive demands upon your energies, nervous prostrations and +derangements are an almost inevitable consequence. It is not the use of +mediumship, but its abuse that is dangerous--perversion and excess are +as injurious in this direction as they are in others, whereas temperate +and healthful exercises are strengthening and exhilarating. If you feel +'run down,' decline to act. If you feel that the circle is inharmonious, +or that the sitters are depleted and exacting, refuse to sit. If you +feel that you are tired, and feel weary and debilitated on the day +following your seances, you may be sure that you are sitting too long, +or that you require the help of a larger circle of congenial friends to +supply the requisite psychic force for your further development." + + +Self-Protection for Mediums. + +Another writer says on this subject: "Mediumship occasionally acts in +such a manner that it becomes a stimulant to every organ and function of +the system, and the individual becomes excited, nervous, and irritable; +hence, the greater the acceleration of physiological functions as the +result of psychical influences upon the human body, the more need of +caution and restraint in every department of physiological life." But it +must not be understood that the proper practice of mediumship is harmful +and not conducive to good health. On the contrary, as a writer has said: +"We consider the highest degree of physical health perfectly compatible +with the best manifestation of mediumship." Another writer has well +said: "If you are not robust enough, if you have not sufficient +knowledge and self-mastery to use your will and maintain control over +your psychic self; if you are unable to guard against the adverse +emanations or the drawing power of others, you had better take lessons +in concentration and psychic self-protection; and until you understand +the art of self-possession, refrain from attempting to cultivate your +sensitiveness. It will never do for you to be 'too sensitive'--be +natural, sensible, and strong." + + +Danger in Indiscriminate Magnetizing. + +Another point against which the medium should guard himself, is that of +allowing others, indiscriminately, to "magnetize" him to "aid his +development" or to "increase his power." Mediums, particularly while in +the psychic condition, are very sensitive and susceptible to outside +mental influences. And for this reason they should be particularly on +guard against allowing themselves to be "magnetized" or influenced +psychically by persons of whom they know nothing. Otherwise, the medium +not only places himself under subjection to the mentality and +emotionality of strangers and undesirable persons, just as would a +hypnotic subject if he placed himself under the control of such persons. +Moreover, in the case of the medium, there is a danger of his being so +influenced in this way that thereafter he may attract to himself a class +of undesirable spirit influences who would otherwise never have come +into his psychic aura or world. We call attention to the following +advice on this point given by an experienced mediumistic writer: + + +Detrimental Magnetic Influence. + +"No sensible person should surrender himself to the magnetic influence +of a human being of whom he knew nothing; he should need to know and +have confidence in him before doing so; yet we find many who, impelled +by a desire to be a medium, without understanding how much the word +implies, sit down and invite any magnetizer who comes along to +experiment upon him. Under such circumstances, nothing but a high motive +and a pure purpose will protect them from the operations of unwise or +mischievous intelligences. As well might they go and sit in a public +place with their eyes blindfolded, and with an inscription on their +breasts, 'Who will come and magnetize me?' * * Mesmeric influence from +an experienced operator, for the purpose of inducing susceptibility, is +sometimes helpful to a sensitive. If the mesmerist can put you in the +trance condition and then hand you over to trustworthy spirits to +control you, well and good. In the same way, mesmeric passes may be +helpful in the liberation of your clairvoyant powers. The operator may +succeed in throwing you into the deep trance state, in which you may +travel or become clairvoyant, but we would not recommend you to submit +to mesmeric influence or hypnotic suggestions from anyone, unless you +know that he is experienced and a thoroughly honorable and trustworthy +individual. In circles for development one member is frequently +impressed, or controlled to make magnetic passes over another to aid in +his unfoldment; and if such a thing should happen to you, and the +influence is congenial, there need be no objection raised by you; but +beware of those people who claim to be able, by mesmerism, to develop +you into a medium in a given period of time." + + +Mediumistic Auto-Suggestion. + +Other authorities have pointed out the fact that in some cases hypnotism +has resulted in a sort of pseudo-mediumship, or bogus mediumship, in +which the control is not that of a real spirit, but is merely the result +of the suggestion of the hypnotizer, or else the auto-suggestion of the +would-be medium himself. A writer on the subject has said of this: "In +too many cases, only the power of auto-hypnotism is manifested, and we +have obsession, fraud and folly as the result. There is one sure method +of detecting the auto-hypnotic trance, and showing the difference +between that and the genuine spirit trance. Any competent magnetist or +hypnotiser can throw off the spell in all cases of self-induced trance, +unless it has reached the condition of complete catalepsy. But if a +spirit has induced the trance and controls the medium, it will laugh at +the hypnotist's efforts to restore him to the ordinary condition. The +most unfortunate feature of this sorry business is that the poor subject +is self-deceived, and imagines that he is a full-fledged medium; and +when he has made some terrible break on the platform or elsewhere he +shields himself by laying all the responsibility upon some supposed +spirit guide." + + +"Psychic Sponges." + +A writer has also called the attention of young mediums to another +undesirable class of psychic hangers-on at seances, as follows: "There +are some people who, when they sit in a circle, are extremely helpful, +and give off the right kind of force that readily blends with that of +the sensitive; but there are others who draw upon and appropriate the +psychic forces which are needed by the medium, or by the spirits through +the medium. While they mean well, enjoy the seances, and feel 'SO much +better' after them, the success of the circle is endangered so far as +the object for which it was formed is concerned. Such persons are +'psychic sponges,' and should be requested to sit outside the circle, or +be asked kindly to refrain from attending." + + +Investigate Your Spirits. + +Finally, the young medium should understand the true nature of the +spirits, and just how far he may be safely guided by their advice and +wishes. The instructions given by an intelligent spirit of good +character may be safely followed as a rule, but the character and +general intelligence of a particular spirit must first be ascertained +through acquaintance with him. Until the character of a spirit has been +fully established, and his claim to intelligence well supported by his +messages, the medium will do well to rely on his or her own good +judgment and intuition. As a writer has well said: "The medium must keep +a level head and proceed cautiously. He should never allow any spirit, +in or out of the body, to usurp his right of private judgment or +exercise any undue authority over him. Eternal vigilance is the price +of liberty; you must use your own discretion and try the spirits before +you trust to them." + + +Spirits Are Still Human Beings. + +Many persons seem to be under the impression that because a spirit +happens to have passed out of the body he will, of necessity, know the +truth about every subject in the range of human thought, and can make no +mistakes, and can always work miracles. But this is a grave mistake; it +should always be remembered that a decarnate spirit is as much a human +being as is an incarnate spirit such as yourself; and not any better or +worse, on the average, than yourself or other incarnate spirits. One +needs but to remember that all sorts and conditions of people are +constantly passing out on to the spirit plane, and that, at least for +some time, they continue to be practically the same kind of persons that +they were on the earth plane. This being so, it will be seen that it +would be very unwise to surrender oneself indiscriminately to each and +every kind of spirit who happens to manifest his presence at a seance. +Persons in the flesh should talk and reason with those out of the flesh +just as they would were the latter still on the earth-plane of life. A +writer well says: "In a developing circle many things can be tolerated, +because both sides are experimenting and 'feeling their way towards each +other,' and it is difficult at first to know just what is necessary or +possible. But it is a safe rule to follow for one to refuse to be +dictated to by the spirits and to decline to go on blindly." + + +Beware of Domineering Spirits. + +A writer has given the following good advice to young mediums, which +such will do well to heed: "Do not always be ready to be controlled, or +to drop into a trance just because you 'feel the influence,' and 'a +spirit wants to say something,' or to oblige injudicious friends who +'wish you would let him come.' Many people are very inconsiderate, and +although they do not SAY so, they THINK (and the sensitive FEELS their +thought) 'I do wish he would go under control and tell me something.' +You should decline to be controlled EXCEPT at the times when you +voluntarily and with set purpose lay yourself open to the influence of +the spirits, in a properly constituted circle, or when you are prepared +for it. If the spirits cause you to do foolish or ridiculous things, +gently but firmly refuse to again submit. Do not be induced to yield by +promise of future greatness and success. Not a few people have had their +vanity tickled and their ambitions aroused by the flattery of crafty and +domineering spirits, and in consequence they have been misled into doing +and saying very absurd and foolish things." + + + + +PART X + +EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE + + +When a circle of sensitive people has been formed, and the necessary +preliminaries of the first sitting have been completed, it is not at all +infrequent that even at the first sitting there should be more or less +manifestation of spirit power. In many cases the sensitives among the +sitters begin to experience a peculiar sensation in their arms and +hands, the latter being placed on the table in front of them. + + +Signs of Spirit Presence. + +There will be manifested in most cases a peculiar sense of heaviness or +weight in the hands on the table, and an impression that the hands are +being held to the table as if by glue or other adhesive material. In the +arms are manifested peculiar tingling, pricking sensations, or a +"needles and pins" feeling, something akin to a gentle current of +electricity passing along them. Sometimes there is experienced the +sensation of a gentle cool breeze passing over the sitters--particularly +over the backs of their hands. In other cases there may be a sense of +numbness or partial loss of sensation, something akin to that +experienced when a hand or arm "goes to sleep," as the popular phrase +expresses it. In other cases there is manifested a peculiar jerking, +twitching, or vibration of the hands and arms, sometimes extending to +the whole body of some of the sitters. Sometimes the hand of the medium +will begin to make motions as if he were trying to write, and a pencil +placed in his hands may trace crude figures or attempts at letters. At +this stage it will be found that the singing of hymns or similar music +will tend to have a quieting, soothing, harmonizing effect. + + +Spirit Rappings. + +At the first sitting, or one shortly following after the first, it is +likely that raps will be produced, and communication established in this +way. In such case the leader of the circle (not the medium) should be +sure to inform the spirits just what communicating code is to be used in +the circle, so that there may be no misunderstanding concerning the +same. In such case he should address the spirits as if there were +several present, for such will most likely be the case. It must be +remembered, however, that the raps will not always come from the table. +They may also, for that matter, come from the wall, the ceiling, or from +some of the furniture in the room. The table raps come from the top of +the table or under the table. Sometimes they sound like ordinary raps, +and then again they may give forth a peculiar hollow sound which is +difficult to describe or to definitely locate. The appearance of these +raps give positive proof that the conditions are being established more +or less fully, and the success of the circle is almost sure to follow. + + +Table Tippings. + +Sometimes, however, in place of the raps being manifested by the spirit +forces, there will instead be manifested that peculiar tipping of the +table which was the distinguishing characteristic of early +spiritualistic phenomena in the western countries. In this case the +tipping of the table will proceed just as in the case of the raps, so +far as the transmission of messages is concerned. That is to say, the +table will tilt three times, one time, etc., in accordance with the +code, just as in the case of communication by means of the raps. In +addition to this, however, the table may begin to manifest strange +motions; it may begin to raise itself, jump around, spin around on one +leg, slide across the rooms, etc. In such cases the hands of the sitters +should be kept on the table, or if they slip off they should be at once +replaced thereupon. Sometimes heavy tables will manifest more activity +than the lighter ones. + + +The Spirit Signals. + +When these rappings or table-tiltings begin to be manifested, all in the +circle should keep cool and calm, and should refuse to become agitated +or excited. If the phenomena should be apparently meaningless and +disconnected, and resulting in no definite communication from the other +side, do not jump to the conclusion that the meaningless rapping or +senseless table tipping is the work of foolish spirits or flippant +decarnate entities. On the contrary, you must remember that not only is +your circle experimenting, but that the spirits on the other side are +also experimenting in hopes of securing proper conditions for +intelligent communications and definite messages. As we have said +before, the spirits have their own troubles, as well as the sitters, and +both sides are really engaged in an effort to "find each other." As a +writer has said: "Remember also that you are merely experimenting, and +that the spirit people are also, perhaps for the first time, trying to +penetrate the veil and utilize powers and agencies of which, in all +probability, they know as little as do you. So many disturbing factors +exist--weather, varying psychical conditions of the sitters, agitated +mental states, too great expectancy, or anxiety for successful +demonstrations--that the true disposition to be maintained by the +inquirer is that of the scientific student, who carefully watches what +transpires, and endeavors to discover the causes of failure as well as +the conditions which favor success." + + +Flashes of Communication. + +In some cases the circle will have to sit several times before the +persistent though disconnected and apparently meaningless raps or +table-tilts will begin to show positive signs of intelligent signalling. +The same thing would probably occur were the inhabitants of the planet +Mars to find themselves able to flash signals to our earth--for a long +time the flashes would seem meaningless to us, until at last they would +seem to manifest a definite intelligent purpose and rhythm. When this +stage of the raps or table-tilts has been reached, then the leader of +the circle should acquaint the spirits with the code used, and ask +definite questions concerning the future conduct of the seance, the +answers to which the spirits are requested to give through the signal +code of raps or tilts. When these answers begin to "come through" +plainly and definitely, then the seance enters a new phase. + + +Spirit Code Signals. + +In this new phase, when once entered into, the formal set procedure to +be followed will be about as follows: The leader of the circle, +recognizing the signs of the presence of spirits in the circle, will +address them and ask them whether or not there is a spirit present who +wishes to convey a message to the circle, or to any one present. Then +the spirits signal back in the affirmative or the negative. If the +answer be in the affirmative, the circle leader asks the spirits to +indicate by the affirmative signal when the name of the right person +present is named--and he then proceeds to slowly and plainly name each +person present, in succession, until the affirmative signal is received. +Or, he may ask the spirits to indicate the identity of the spirit +friends present, when their names are called; and he then proceeds to +call over the names of the departed friends of those present, as the +same are requested by the sitters or visitors to the circle. When the +right name is reached, the spirits signal in the affirmative, either by +raps of table-tilts, etc. After the question-and-answer line of +communication has been firmly and strongly established, more definite +information may be obtained by the instruction of the system of +"alphabet calling," as described in a preceding portion of this book. +In this system, the letters of the alphabet are slowly and clearly +called off, in succession, until the affirmative signal is given +regarding the letter just called, which indicates that that letter is to +be marked down as a part of the sentence. Wonderful messages have been +received in this way, although the process is very slow and somewhat +tedious in the case of long messages. + + +Ouija Boards. + +Of late years the sitters at circles have found a quicker method of +obtaining "letter by letter" messages by means of the apparatus called +"the Ouija Board," which consists of a moving "Planchette" with an +indicator which moves over the letters marked on a board, the hands of +the sitters (or certain of their number) being placed on the table of +the "Planchette." The indicator moves over the line of letters, and +indicates the letters of the message, one by one. The Ouija Boards are +sold at a moderate price, and will be found a valuable adjunct to any +spiritualistic circle. During the past few years, public attention has +been strongly directed to this manner of obtaining spirit communications +by reason of newspaper notices concerning the same, and the fact that +several books have been written under spirit guidance imparted in this +particular way. + + +A Home-Made Ouija Board. + +A writer has given the following directions for making a "home-made +Ouija Board," viz., "A Planchette may be used as an 'Ouija' by laying +down a sheet of paper upon which the letters of the alphabet have been +written or printed in a fairly large semi-circle, the words 'Yes' or +'No' being written at either end, and figures from 1 to 9 written +straight across a little lower down. Now remove the pencil and insert a +small moderately sharpened stick as a pointer, and the Planchette may +run about, point to letters or numbers, answers your questions at 'Yes' +or 'No,' or messages may be spelt out as you watch its movements." + + +Trance or Inspirational Mediumship. + +Through the development and unfoldment afforded by the development +circle, the mediumistic persons in that circle, particularly the medium +who is "sitting for development" in the circle, will in all probability +develop that phase of mediumship caller "Trance Mediumship," or +"Inspirational Mediumship." Of this phase of mediumship a writer has +said: "This mental phase of mediumship involves the development of a +degree of impressibility which may range from the conscious reception of +suggestion, or impulses, or thoughts from other intelligences, to the +lucidity on the spiritual plane which is displayed by conscious +clear-seeing, or spirit-sight. The phenomena of super-sensuous reception +due to spirit influence are elicited in much the same way as a mesmerist +arouses the clairvoyant powers of his subject. The somnambulic sleep, or +trance, is induced in the subject whose voluntary powers are no longer +under his control, and the involuntary processes are well-nigh +suspended. In this state his spirit sometimes gains a larger degree of +freedom, and is able to perceive on the inner or spiritual plane. + + +Symptoms of Trance Condition. + +"If you are likely to become a trance-speaking medium, you will probably +experience a sensation as a falling or dizziness, as if you were going +to faint; this may continue until you become entirely unconscious on the +external plane, and you will know no more until you regain your normal +condition, although, while under the influence of the operator, you may +have been speaking more or less coherently. He may not, at first, be +able to convey the exact impression he wishes to produce. His +'suggestion' is not strong enough to set your involuntary nerves +vibrating in just the way he desires; consequently his thought is not +transferred to you in a manner which insures faithful reproduction, and +you should not be disappointed because of such imperfect results at the +outset. If your mind is filled with the desire to succeed, you will +become too self-conscious, and will thus destroy the very condition upon +which success depends." + + +The Entranced State. + +Another mediumistic writer says: "The entrancement usually takes place +all at once, and the entranced one passes into the realm of +communication with the spirits without much warning of any kind. When +the medium is entranced it is highly essential that there be no +commotion or fear expressed in thought or action in the circle. It must +be remembered that the welfare of the medium depends a great deal on the +conditions of the others present, and purity of thought and pleasant +expectation should be the first thing looked after when the entrancement +occurs. In passing into the trance, the medium usually grows very pale +and acts not unlike a person going into a faint. But he or she must be +allowed to pass behind the veil without any commotion. When the +entrancement is accomplished, the manifestations may take place in +different ways. There are, in fact, many forms of manifestation +belonging to this particular phase of mediumship, but they all come +under the general rule and conditions." + + +Trance Phenomena. + +Another writer has said: "In entering the trance condition of +mediumship, you will probably become semi-conscious, or perhaps almost +completely unconscious. The influence will stimulate your breathing, +which will become rapid and irregular; your eyes will close and you will +be unable to open them, and your hands and body may twitch and jerk as +if you were being subjected to a series of galvanic shocks. The sitters +should keep calm and sympathetic, but they should check any tendency on +the part of the medium to undue noise, or violence, or absurdity. You +will be aware of what you are doing, but will be unable to fully +exercise the will to interfere or try to stop. You will most likely +become conscious of an impulse to do something, or to blurt out certain +words. If you resist, you will only make the task more difficult and +hinder the attainment of the end you have in view. Your best course is +to hold your judgment in suspense; so do not be hostile or critical, but +act out your impressions. + + +Entering the Trance. + +"Let the influence have its course--say what you feel you MUST say, and +never mind about your own state of consciousness. You will be much more +likely to pass into the unconsciousness of the trance (if you desire to +do so) if you say, 'Now, spirit friend, I trust myself to you, and will +yield my body and brain to your control, for you to do the best you can +with and through me. I am willing to co-operate with you for the time +being, and trust you to do your utmost for the good of others.' It is +not necessary that you should be utterly unconscious, although you may +think it is, to prove that another intelligence is operating upon and +through you. The evidence of that fact will be displayed in the nature +of the message and the unusual ability displayed by you when under the +stimulating influence of the operator. + + +Advice to Trance Mediums. + +"Most mediums find that their powers vary. Sometimes there seems to be a +high degree of lucidity. The impressions which they receive are clear +and strong; and the ideas seem to flow through them freely, and the +quality of the inspirations is exhilarating, and they feel strengthened +and uplifted. But there are other days when they feel very much alone. +The influence that affects them is weak; they get only hazy impressions, +and there is a woeful lack of ideas. It seems as if the heavens were +brass, or that they themselves were unresponsive. They know not why, but +whatever they can 'lay hold of' to speak, or whatever the spirit people +can project into their sphere seems forced and incomplete. If you should +ever have these experiences, turn your attention to something else. Do +not 'harp on one string' too much. Physical exercise, change of scene, +social company, and rest, will soon restore your tone and renew your +powers." + + +Speaking Mediumship. + +In that form of Trance or Inspirational Mediumship generally known as +"Speaking Mediumship," the communicating spirit assumes partial or +complete control of the vocal organs of the medium, and the spirit then +directly addresses the circle or audience of listeners, just as he would +do were he, himself, actually in the flesh confronting them and using +his own vocal organs. In such addressing the spirit manifests many of +the characteristics which distinguished him during his earth life. The +medium's voice is changed, and his manner takes on a quite different +form, i.e., that of the spirit which he possessed in his own earth life. +In fact, in some cases, it has actually been observed that the very body +of the medium seemed to either shrink, or else enlarge, as if taking the +form of the etheric framework of the controlling spirit. + + +Public Speaking Under Control. + +A writer gives the following advice concerning Speaking Mediumship: +"Should you be controlled to give public addresses, it will be best to +withhold the name of the spirit who prompts or controls your utterances. +Most intelligent spirits prefer to be known by their teachings, rather +than by the names they bore when on earth. If the addresses are eloquent +and beautiful, and the thoughts presented are good and true, they will +be acceptable on their own merits, and would not be one bit more +valuable because they were inspired by some well-known historical +persons. Whereas, if you announce the name of a spirit, your hearers may +consider that the address does not come up to the standard of the +ability displayed by that individual before he dies, and may discredit +and discard the good that they might otherwise have found in your +utterances." + + +Spirit Advice and Counsel. + +If spirits voluntarily tender you their advice upon business matters, +especially if they are friends or relatives whom you know and trust, and +who, when here, were capable and experienced business people, you may +well give heed to their counsel, even though you may not feel it wise to +follow it; but do not make a practice of going to the spirits for +information concerning trade or finance. Why should you expect that wise +and enlightened spirits should concern themselves about stocks and +shares, commerce, or manufacturing? Probably they knew but little about +these things when they were here, and have no heed for such knowledge +over there; and it will be well for you to learn to live your own life, +do your business, and accept the ordinary duties and responsibilities +which naturally devolve upon you. Let mediumship be a PART of your +education and development, not the WHOLE. + +Impersonating Manifestations. + +It will often happen that some spirit will take control of the medium +for the purpose of communicating with a friend present in the circle or +AUDIENCE, and for the purpose of positively identifying himself to that +friend, he may deem it necessary to cause you to impersonate himself as +he was during his earth life. In such cases you will experience a +peculiar feeling of undergoing a complete transformation of personality, +and often a dual-personality for the time being. Another instance of +this kind is where a spirit wishing to communicate with friends, and +this being his first opportunity to manifest in the impersonating phase, +he may yield to that peculiar psychic law which seems to operate in the +direction of causing a spirit, manifesting for the first time, to enact +his dying experiences, and to manifest a pantomimic reproduction of his +last hours preceding death. In such cases, the medium reproduces, in a +most startlingly real manner, the movements, ways of breathing, +coughing, gestures, ejaculations, and may even go so far as to utter the +"last words" of the dying man whose spirit now controls the medium. +Every medium should be prepared for an experience of this kind, for it +will sometimes completely upset a medium unfamiliar with it, and not +knowing just what it all means. + + +Incidents of Impersonations. + +In a case such as stated above, the medium will probably find himself +either partially or completely conscious of what is being said and done +by the spirit through his body or vocal organs. He will naturally strive +to escape the utterance of the strange cries, moans, vocal gasps and +efforts, and the dead cries and farewell words of the dying man or +woman. Some mediums have felt at such times as if they were losing their +reason, and they have struggled to throw off the spirit control and +influence in order to regain their mental balance. The best mediums +advise the young mediums to keep as cool, calm, and collected as +possible in such cases, and not to allow themselves to become +panic-stricken. A writer on the subject has said: "Trust to the +sincerity of the spirit and the good sense of the sitters, and throw off +your fear. Yield obedience to your control, and neither help nor hinder +it. Just do and say what you feel you HAVE to do or say, and leave the +results. You cannot, or should not, be held responsible for failure by +the sitters, if there is no recognition; and by responding and giving +free course to the suggestion, which reaches you as an impulse or mental +impression, greater success will follow, and the development you seek +will be promoted. If, however, you find that the impersonations are +untrue, and the sitters are unable to interpret or recognize what you do +or say after you have followed out your impressions a number of times, +then resist them with all your strength of will, and require from the +spirit the proof of his identity in some other way." + + +Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship. + +Another writer speaking concerning inspirational mediumship, has said: +"In inspirational speaking it will be noted that the medium often gives +a really wonderful speech, although he may naturally be a very poor +conversationalist. These speeches are often preserved and some of them +form exceptionally interesting literature. These speeches are generally +given when the medium is seated, but sometimes he loses balance and +falls to the floor. Still, as long as the spirit control has anything to +say, he will say it through the vocal organs of the medium. But it must +always be borne in mind that a medium does not, as a general rule, +become an inspirational speaker all at once. There is a stage of +development through which he must pass in which the spirit control +assumes charge of the body of the medium, and this takes some time and +is usually accomplished in steps. First, the medium gives evidence of +inspirational speaking by uttering guttural sounds, and very often his +mouth merely moves without giving forth any sound whatever. Little by +little the control gains access to the inner atmosphere of the medium, +and when he has broken the final barriers, he can speak and act and +deliver what he has to say. But it must be remembered that the mind of +the medium is not to be left out of the question entirely. He is often +called upon to aid in the interpretation of the speeches the spirit +delivers, and these he may misinterpret and lend to them color of his +own mentality, without his conscious intention to do so, however." + + +Value of Identification. + +In impersonation mediumship, however, no matter how interesting the +manifestation may be, it is of prime importance that the identity of the +spirit should be clearly established, providing that the spirit himself +claims positively to be some particular individual; this, of course, +does not apply to instances in which the spirit does not claim identity +with any particular departed person, and where the communications are +given anonymously. It is this feature of identification that renders +this phase of mediumship so valuable and important. A well-known +medium, in a trance state, once delivered the following message from a +spirit: "Impersonation mediumship is the most valuable that the world +can possibly have today. When by the aid of the impersonating medium, +the inquirer is enabled to converse with his beloved deceased friends, +and they make themselves actually visible in the personality of the +medium, plain to consciousness and understanding, and tell him +specifically points and facts of identity and experience that are +utterly beyond the power of any other intelligence to tell, then he has +something borne in upon him through the senses of sight, of hearing and +understanding that appeals to him. Therefore, the impersonating medium +is the most valuable medium you can present to inquirers." Another +mediumistic writer has said: "This kind of mediumship carries conviction +of the real presence of the so-called dead, and your aim should be to +get into communication with the intelligent operator at the other end of +the line, and elicit from him evidences of his identity and purpose. +Table movements, raps, materializations, writings, messages, or +controls, are of comparatively little value unless by their agency you +can secure proofs of the personal identity and survival after death of +your departed friends, or some indications of a rational purpose on the +part of the operator." + + +Fraudulent Claims of Identity. + +We would be lacking in our sense of duty and obligation toward our +readers, however, were we to refrain from calling their attention to the +fact that positive and strict identification of the spirits, in cases +where identity is claimed, is a duty on the part of investigators, +particularly on the part of those who happen to be relatives or friends +of the deceased person whose presence and identity are being claimed by +the controlling spirit who is manifesting the impersonation. As we have +said, elsewhere, we must remember that there are all kinds of decarnate +spirits, just as there are all kinds of incarnate spirits; and that the +nature of a spirit is not greatly changed by passing out of the body. +Just as there are imposters on the earth plane, so are there imposters +on the spirit plane. And, accordingly, caution is to be exercised on +both planes. The following quotations from mediumistic writers will +serve to illustrate this point, and to show that the best mediumistic +authorities themselves insist upon this precaution being taken. + + +Guarding Against Fraudulent Spirits. + +One writer says: "While most mediums seek for some guide or control of +prominence, it must not be always taken for granted that the controlling +spirit during a seance is always just what he claims to be. For +instance, a spirit control might give his name as Henry Clay, and he +might deliver a spirited talk or oration, which, however, would be +reeking with grammatical errors. Even though he insist that he is Henry +Clay, our reason will tell us that he is not what he pretends to be. The +change which we call death cannot lead all spirits to reform, and there +are many who, as in earth life, are unworthy of our association, and +should be gotten rid of as soon as they appear. When these fraudulent +spirits appear, the atmosphere of the circle should be made very sacred +and high in character. Evil spirits, and those of low characters, +cannot endure the presence of elevated and high thoughts, and by the +holding of thoughts of this character the circle can soon rid itself for +good of these troublesome entities--and it should do so without fail." + + +Spirit Jokers. + +Another writer says, on this point: "That there are spirits who +sometimes impersonate, and seek to pass themselves off as friends of the +sitters, cannot be denied; in fact, we have had personal proof of the +same on several occasions. But these troublesome and vexatious visitors +invariably get 'bowled out' if the investigators are observant and +careful. In fact, such entities are neither as numerous, or as evilly +disposed, as many persons imagine them to be. There are spirits who +'play up to' the weaknesses and flatter the vanity of those to whom they +communicate. And it is equally true that there are spirits who give +glowing assurances of the good things that they will perform by-and-by, +and profess to be some of the 'great ones' of the past, is equally true. +It is a well-known saying that 'people love a lord,' and this amiable +weakness is fully realized by the jokers on the other side--but the +fault does not wholly rest with them! Their too confiding and credulous +mediums are too often in the main responsible for their own +mystification and misleading. They are often so anxious to be guided by +some 'eminent' person who will be to them an 'authority,' that they +practically invite spirit pretenders to fool them to the top of their +bent. This does not apply to all cases of real or supposed deception, +but it does cover a large proportion of such experiences. In many +instances there is an element of self-deception--or auto-suggestion--and +the 'wish becomes father to the thought,' and the sensitive medium's +unrestrained imaginative powers do the rest." + + +A Typical Case of Identification. + +The following typical case of undoubted identification of a visiting +spirit is related by Smedley in his work concerning spiritualistic +experiences, and may be taken as a pattern to be followed by +investigators in demanding and obtaining proofs of identity in cases +where same is asserted. The medium in this case was a woman of high +standing in spiritualistic circles, and the seance took place in Mr. +Smedley's own home. The medium was at that time a perfect stranger to +the Smedley family, and to their little circle of invited friends. The +seance was opened by the singing of hymns, and before long the medium +went under control. Mr. Smedley says: "She passed under the control of +an intelligent being, opened her eyes, and manifested the greatest +amazement." He then relates the subsequent experience as follows: + + +Recalling Past Incidents. + +"After looking around the room very deliberately at various objects, +then at one person after another, and fixing her eyes on my wife, she +ran across the room, and throwing her arms around my wife's neck, she +kissed her most affectionately, addressing her as 'My dear sister.' +After speaking with my wife in endearing terms, she came across the room +to me, and placing her right hand on my shoulder, said: 'Well, my dear +brother.' (This was exactly as a deceased sister of my wife had been in +the habit of doing.) 'How unspeakingly glad I am for such a privilege as +this! When we used to sit by the hearth at night, conversing on various +topics that used to interest us so much, we little expected we should +ever have such a privilege. You know we used to sit up at night +discussing theological questions till the embers in the grate died out, +and sometimes a chiding voice from upstairs cried out: "Alfred, Alfred, +do come to bed. Do you know what time it is? You know Charlotte is not +fit to sit up so late."' This was precisely what had taken place, the +exact words being used. + + +Identifying Property. + +"She referred to a number of incidents known only to her and ourselves. +She asked for an album in which she had written the dedication, pointing +this out, and also various pieces of poetry she had written in it. She +asked for a hymn-book, and desired us to sing what had been her favorite +hymn, which at my request she instantly found. She next asked for a +Bible, and asked me to read her favorite Psalm. I requested her to find +it, although I knew well which it was. She turned to it instantly, and I +read: 'The Lord is my shepherd,' etc. When the Psalm was finished, the +medium stood transfigured before us; her countenance was radiant, and +her eyes bright with a heavenly light. Turning to my wife, she said: +'Sister, dear, by inviting strangers to your house tonight you have +entertained angels unawares!' After the meeting, the medium remarked: +'When under control I was strongly influenced to look around for a +picture, but could not find it. I do not know what it meant, but the +control was anxious to find a picture.' My wife replied: 'My sister +painted a picture of the Saviour bearing His cross, many years ago, and +it now hangs in our dining room.' The above incidents, combined with her +mannerisms, and bearing in mind that the medium was an entire stranger +to us, and uneducated, were sufficient evidence of the presence and +influence of her deceased sister to cause my wife to exclaim, 'OF A +TRUTH, THAT WAS MY SISTER CHARLOTTE!'" + + +Identifying Historical Personages. + +Of course, a close, personal identification, similar to that stated in +the above recital, is impossible in cases when the spirit claims to be +some well-known historical personage. But in the last named class of +cases it will be found possible to ask questions concerning the life and +career of the supposed celebrity, and to form a general idea of the +correctness of the claim by the quality and general character of the +answers given. It will be found that genuine spirits are nearly always +anxious to definitely establish the truth of their claims to identity, +and will often go to great pains to do so. The character of the language +employed, the grammar followed, and the general evidence of the +intellectual capacity of the spirit, all these will be found useful in +testing cases of claimed identity; and no genuine spirit has any just +cause to object to such tests and questions, if made in the proper +scientific spirit, and with ordinary politeness. In short, treat the +spirit just as you would were he in the flesh, speaking to you over a +telephone, and endeavoring to establish his identity; this will always +be a safe and just rule to employ and follow. + + + + +PART XI + +HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS + + +We frequently hear of, and witness manifestations of, what is called +"spirit psychometry," "spirit clairvoyance," and "spirit clairaudience." +In the earlier chapters of the present book we have spoken of the +psychic principles and laws underlying psychometry, clairvoyance, and +clairaudience. We have seen that all of these forms and phases of +psychic phenomena are capable of being produced independent of spirit +guidance, control, or influence. In fact, most of such manifestations +are so produced, even when they are considered to be phases of spirit +mediumship. But, outside of these manifestations, there are found cases +in which such phenomena are produced by the aid, influence, and +assistance, if not indeed the direct power of, the controlling spirits +of the medium. + + +Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance. + +In those instances in which the controlling influence of such phenomena +is clearly that of disembodied spirits, we find two distinct classes of +the same, as follows: (1) cases in which the spirits aided in the +establishing of the psychic rapport, and thus rendered more efficient, +clear, and strong; (2) cases in which the spirits exerted their own +psychometric, clairvoyant or clairaudient power, and then communicated +the result through their mediums to the circle. In the first of above +classes, the psychic faculties of the medium really perform the work, +although greatly aided by the addition of the psychic power of the +spirit. In the second of the above classes, the work is performed solely +by the psychic powers of the spirits, and the medium acts merely as the +line of communication between spirit and the circle. It must be +remembered that the spirits who have passed out of the body are +possessed of the same order of psychic faculties as are those still in +the body, and that, likewise, on both planes there is a great variation +of the degree of such powers between different individuals. + + +Spirit Psychic Assistance. + +From the above, it will be seen that a mediumistic person may practice +in psychometry, clairvoyance, and clairaudience, either with or without +the assistance of the spirits. In case the spirits are assisting in the +direction of performing the psychic work themselves, and then +communicating the result to the medium, the medium of course has but to +remain passive and receive the communication. In cases, however, in +which the spirits assist merely by strengthening the psychic power of +the medium by aiding in the production of the rapport conditions, or by +lending the psychic power to add to that of the medium, then the medium +has but to proceed just as we have pointed out in the earlier portions +of this book devoted to the subjects of psychometry, clairvoyance, etc. + + +Writing Mediumship. + +In what is known as "writing mediumship" the medium's hand is controlled +by the spirit, and is caused to write messages to those present, or to +answer questions propounded by some of those present at the circle. In +some quarters such writing is called "automatic writing," but inasmuch +as this last term is also applied to cases in which the hand of the +person writes a message telepathed by a living person, it would seem +that the old term "writing mediumship" is still the best one to use in +the cases in which the spirit control is using the hand of the medium +for the purpose of communication. The following statements made by +different mediumistic writers on this particular subject will prove +interesting and instructive to the young mediums seeking development +along the lines of this special phase of mediumship. + + +Incidents of Writing Mediumship. + +One writer says: "If the medium reaches the writing stage, he generally +passes into it in much the same manner that he does into the +inspirational speaking. That is, he becomes entranced, and in +entrancement of this kind he usually loses his conscious self, although +it is not essential that he should do so. He may remain partially +conscious, but he will be very pale and will have no control whatever +over the hand which does the writing. When the hand that writes is +generally the only part of him that becomes numb, one entire side may +become limp and inactive, and it is at this stage that a pencil must be +placed in his hand all ready for writing, and a large sheet of heavy +paper be put on the table before him. It is urged that the pencil be a +heavy one, and the paper tough and coarse, for the first writing of a +writing medium is not even a fair specimen of penmanship, being heavy +and very difficult to decipher. As his hand wanders here and there, his +body may sway and the pencil be brought in contact with the paper. When +he begins to write, the strokes are crude and jerky and uncertain. The +first notes that he delivers to the sitters are very often difficult to +make out, and sometimes it is impossible to tell what they are. But this +condition will be gradually overcome until the writing is very fair, and +finally it can be written on much finer paper and with an ordinary +pencil. When questions are to be asked, they may be put direct to the +medium, and the answers will be written out and signed by the spirit +sending them. As the medium develops, it will not be necessary for him +to have the questions put to him verbally. Write the questions on a +little slip of paper, and place these slips in his hands. The spirit +will read them, and then use his arm as before in writing out answers. +But this stage cannot be attained in a day or a week, and it is a sign +of the higher forms of development, and should be looked upon by the +members of the circle as evidence of the highest order establishing the +great success they have attained." + + +Developing Writing Mediumship. + +Another writer on the subject of writing mediumship says to those +developing this phase of mediumship: "Your hands may be caused to shake +and move about as if you desired to write. You may be quite conscious, +or only semi-conscious, but you will feel that you are unable to prevent +the movements. In such a case, the sitters should provide pencil and +paper and await results. They should speak to the control and request +him to work quietly, and in all probability the rapid preliminary +scrawls will soon give place to slower and more legible writing. Many +persons have developed as writing mediums who have never sat in a +circle, and without being entranced. We should advise you, if you decide +to sit alone and make experiments in this direction, to avoid +excitement, expectancy, and preconceptions. Proceed as though you were +speaking to a visible friend, and request that someone will move your +hands to write. Provide yourself with a writing pad, or several sheets +of paper, and while holding a pencil in readiness, withdraw your +thoughts from your hand and arm, and assume a passive condition. If you +are strongly mediumistic, words and sentences may be written, but you +need hardly expect such results at first." + + +Stead's Method and Results. + +W. T. Stead, the eminent English investigator, said: "I hold my pen in +the ordinary way, but when the writing is beginning I do not rest my +wrist or arm upon the paper, so as to avoid the friction, and to give +the influence, whatever it may be, more complete control of the pen. At +first, the pen is apt to wander into mere scrawling, but after a time it +writes legibly. Unlike many automatic writers who write as well +blindfolded as when they read what they write as they are writing it, I +can never write so well as when I see the words as they come. There is +danger in this, which is most clearly illustrated When my hand writes +verse--especially rhymed verse--for the last word in each line suggests +to my conscious mind a possible rhyme for the ending of the following +line; this rouses up my mind, my own ideas get mixed with those of the +communicating intelligence, and confusion is the result." The above +statement of Mr. Stead becomes doubly interesting and valuable when we +remember that through his hand, controlled by a spirit intelligence, +came that wonderful series of messages afterward published under the +title of "Letters from Julia," which book excited the attention and +interest of the civilized world at the time of its publication, and even +to this day enjoys a great popularity. + + +Automatic Writing vs. Inspirational Writing. + +Another writer says: "Inspirational or impressional writing is +frequently mistaken for that which is more purely passive or automatic. +The medium or sensitive person experiences a strong impulse to write, +but does not receive any clear or consecutive train of thought. He sets +down one word, and then others follow as fast as he can indicate them, +but he must begin to write before the complete sentence is given to him. +In other cases, the thoughts flow into his consciousness faster than his +pen can record them; but in the truly 'automatic' form of communication +the mind of the sensitive is not consciously affected. He can read and +think about other and entirely different subjects, and need take no more +interest in the work than he would if his hand did not belong to him nor +than if a spirit laid hold of and guided the pencil. Some mediums who +write automatically have to be mentally quiet; they find that if the +mind is preoccupied the hand will not write, although, even in such +cases, it frequently happens that the amanuensis is ignorant of the +communication until he reads it afterwards." + + +Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing. + +J. A. White, a trance and clairvoyant medium himself, says of the phase +of writing mediumship: "There is a great tendency, particularly in cases +of automatic writing, to do too much of it. No sooner do some people +find that the pencil will move, than they spend all their spare time in +this fascinating pursuit, which, in their undeveloped state, I believe +to be a dangerous and unwise practice. They are apt to exclaim, when any +question arises during the day: 'Let us see what the spirits have to +say.' This, carried to extremes, leads to one thing, and one thing +only--obsession. I believe in fixing a time, and, unless in exceptional +cases, refusing to sit at any other. Of course I am speaking of +mediumship when it is in its budding stage. A developed medium can judge +for himself, and knows from experience how far to go. It is a favorite +trick of a certain class of spirits when they find they have a sensitive +who can 'feel' them, to give them that pricking sensation in the arm +which denotes their presence. 'So-and-so wants to write,' and away +rushes the medium for the pencil, and sits down. This I do not believe +in. I have seen far more harm than good come from it. The proper way to +develop, in my opinion, is to sit at home in a small, carefully selected +circle, two or three times a week, at stated hours, and with a competent +conductor who knows what he is doing." + + +Advice to Writing Mediums. + +A French medium says: "We urge beginners in their own interest not to +take up the pencil for automatic writing, or to sit at a table for +communications at any free moment, without rhyme or reason, for disorder +in experiment is one of the first and most serious dangers to be +avoided. An absolutely strict rule should be made not to attempt the +effort more than once every other day." Another writer says: "The +communications that are received by the various forms of passive, +impressional, automatic, and inspirational writing must not be regarded +as valuable merely because of the conditions under which they were +obtained, nor because of their spirit origin, real or supposed. Under +all circumstances receive with the utmost reserve and caution +long-winded communications from notable characters who claim to be +'Napoleon Bonaparte,' 'Lord Bacon,' 'Socrates,' or other great +personages; for in the majority of cases, the value of the communication +is exactly the reverse of the importance of the name attached. This +applies to automatic writings quite as much as to spoken messages. Judge +the statement made by the ordinary standards, apart from their claimed +exalted origin. If rational, beautiful, and spiritually helpful and +enlightening, they are worth having on their own merits; but if they +are unreasonable, wild or dogmatic, or pretentious and flattering, they +should be discarded; and, unless you change their character after +repeated experiments, your attention should be turned in some other +direction." + + +Drawing Mediumship. + +What is known as "drawing mediumship" is but a variation of writing +mediumship, at least so far as is concerned the nature of the +manifestation. In both cases the spirit control moves the hand of the +medium, in one case forming letters and words, and in the other case +forming figures, designs, etc. In some rare instances, the spirit +control operating through the hand of the medium has produced crayon +drawings, water color sketches, and even oil paintings, although the +medium himself or herself, was unable to even draw a straight line, much +less to execute a finished drawing or painting. The principle governing +such mediumship, and the development, thereof, is precisely the same as +that governing the phase of writing mediumship previously described. + + +The Planchette. + +From time to time, during the past fifty years, there have been invented +or arranged various forms of mechanical contrivances designed to assist +in the development of writing mediumship. The most popular of these has +been the Planchette, which has enjoyed great popularity for many years +past. The Planchette is a little heart-shaped board, having two legs, +with tiny wheels at the end, attached to the board. Near the pointed end +of the heart-shaped board is a hole, into which a pencil is inserted. A +sheet of paper of good size is spread upon a table, and the Planchette +is placed thereupon. Then the sitter, or two sitters, place their hand +or hands upon the board--generally resting only the tips of their +fingers lightly upon it. The sitter or sitters then await results. + + +How to Use the Planchette. + +If the sitter is mediumistic the Planchette will begin to move about +slowly at first, gradually gathering force and definite direction. After +a few preliminary strokes, circles, or lines having been drawn, the +Planchette will seem to have been firmly taken hold of by some spirit +hand, and will begin to write words and sentences in a more or less +'scrawly' fashion. When the writing once begins, questions may be asked +of and answered by the spirits. Some persons report that to them the +Planchette seems to move by itself, pulling their hands with it; but +others report that they feel the movement of their arms and hands, as +the spirit propels the machine in the work of waiting. Some know what is +being written during the process, while others do not know what has been +written until they afterwards read it. Sometimes the writing begins Boon +after the sitting is commenced, while in other cases the sitters have to +wait a long time, or even to sit several times before the writing +actually begins. Sometimes the Planchette will refuse to write for +certain persons, but will write freely for others. The general advice is +to exercise patience in the Planchette sittings, and not to expect to +get the best results at once; and, particularly, not to begin asking +questions immediately after the writing begins. + + +Healing Mediumship. + +Some mediums seem to be particularly adapted to the work of healing by +psychic force, and this phase of mediumship is known as "healing +mediumship." The healing medium is guided principally by the spirit +influence, so far as is concerned the choice of methods of procedure in +his healing work. The following directions, however, given by a +mediumistic writer, will give the young medium a very good, practical +general idea of the procedure to be followed in case his spirit control +does not indicate some other method. This writer says: + + +How to Heal by Spirit Power. + +"If you are impressed with the idea that you possess healing power, you +can easily experiment upon your suffering friends or acquaintances. If +you are mediumistic, and spirits desire to develop you for the healing +work, you will readily feel that you are impressed what to do. Your +hands will be guided to the proper position, and you will spontaneously +make the requisite passes. Magnetic healing has really nothing to do +with massage, the induction of sleep, or with any form of mesmerism or +hypnotism. The healing medium should centre his thought and interest +solely and wholly with the idea of effecting a cure. He will need to be +sympathetic, but hopeful. Do not let your patient think about his +ailments, but arouse his thought and engage his attention upon some +outside subject. Make him feel comfortable, and lead him to expect good +results; to do this you must be affirmative and confident. Unless you +are impressed, or are controlled, to do otherwise, sit in front and take +hold of the hands of the sufferer for a time, then make gentle, short, +downward passes over the part affected, and conclude with long sweeping +passes from head to foot without contact. For local affections, point +your hands at or just touch the spot with your finger tips, or make +direct horizontal or slightly downward movements, as if you were +throwing something at him. A warm, comfortable room is favorable to +magnetizing, and a genial mental atmosphere, created by cheerful and +kindly minds in the operator and persons present, will contribute +largely to the success of the treatment. You will do well to act upon +your impressions and make the passes in whatever way you feel impelled +or compelled. If you operate under spirit guidance, you will be +impressed more or less clearly how to proceed in each case. In all +probability you may sympathetically 'take on,' and be affected by, the +symptoms of the disease from which the patient suffers, and in that way +be able to form an accurate diagnosis of the case; but you must guard +against exhaustion, and should always 'throw off' from yourself the +influence that you have received, and wash your hands thoroughly after +each treatment." + + +Materialization Mediumship. + +One of the rarest, and at the same time the most eagerly sought after +phase of mediumship, is that known as "materialization mediumship." In +this phase of mediumship the decarnate spirit is able to draw upon the +vital forces of the medium, and those present at the seance, to such +effect that it may clothe itself with a tenuous, subtle form of matter, +and then exhibit itself to the sitters in the same form and appearance +that it had previously presented in its earth life. Many of the most +remarkable testimonies to the truth and validity of spiritualism have +been obtained through this phase of mediumship, and it is the aim of all +investigators to witness, and of most mediums to be the channel of the +production of, this remarkable phase of mediumistic phenomena. + +In almost all instances of materialization phenomena in the record of +modern spiritualism we find that a cabinet was employed. There are two +main reasons advanced for the necessity of the cabinet in this phase of +mediumistic phenomena. The first of said reasons is that in many cases +darkness has been found necessary for the preliminary work of the +materialization, although absolute darkness is not necessary in the +general room in which the materialized spirit forms afterward appear. +The second of the said reasons is that there seems to be a psychic +atmosphere created by the blending of the spirit forces with those of +the medium, which atmosphere must be kept apart from and unmixed with +the auras of the members of the outside circle or the general visitors +at the seance. + + +Why the Cabinet Is Necessary. + +Just what is the technical reason for this necessity is a source of +argument and dispute among the different authorities on the subject, +and it may be said that the matter is not as yet definitely settled. But +whatever may be such technical explanation, the fact remains that the +seclusion of the medium has been found almost absolutely necessary for +the production of the phenomena of spirit materialization. The few +exceptions noted in the history of modern spiritualism only go to +establish the general rule. For the purpose of a general study of the +subject, it may be accepted as a general fact that the production of +spirit materialization has as one of its necessary conditions the +presence and use of a dark cabinet in which the medium is secluded from +the circle or assemblage of persons attending the seance. + + +How to Make the Spirit Cabinet. + +One of the best kind of cabinets for this purpose is a small alcove +room, or other small room adjoining the room in which the visitors sit +at the seance. A large closet will also answer the purpose very well, in +fact many mediums prefer the closet to any other form of cabinet. If +neither small room or closet is available, then it becomes necessary to +build or erect a cabinet for the medium. One of the simplest and least +expensive methods of building or erecting a cabinet for the medium is as +follows: Take a large piece of dark cloth, cotton or woolen, or else a +large shawl, and fasten it by stout twine or cord across a corner of the +room. It will be better if the curtain is made in two pieces, so as to +allow it to part in the middle for the purpose of the entry and exit of +the medium, and for the purpose of allowing the materialized spirit form +to show itself to the circle. It is not necessary that all light be +excluded from the cabinet, and therefore it need cause no worriment if a +little light filters in over the top of the curtain; but the lights in +the main room should be kept burning "dim and low," not only for the +purpose of aiding in the actual work or materialization, but also in +order to preserve the proper conditions when the materialized spirit +presents itself between the opened curtains. + + +How to Use the Spirit Cabinet. + +When the cabinet is properly arranged the medium enters it and sits down +on a chair provided for that purpose. He should not be disturbed +thereafter, but should be encouraged and aided in his work by the +maintenance of a quite, reverent mental attitude on the part of the +members of the circle. It will be found helpful if a few hymns are sung +while waiting for manifestations from the cabinet. The best way to +encourage materialization at a regular circle is for gradual steps to be +taken leading up to this high phase of phenomena. For example, the +circle should sit in the ordinary way at its regular meetings, and +devote itself to the production of the lesser forms of phenomena. Then, +before adjournment, the medium may go into the cabinet while the circle +sits for materialization phenomena. This practice may be made to form a +regular part of the proceedings of the circle. But the circle must be +very patient concerning the production of this class of phenomena, for +the necessary conditions are very difficult to develop, even when aided +by the most powerful spirits. Many sittings may be required before even +the slightest sign of materialization is obtained--but the final result +will repay much waiting and watching, much patience and much +perseverance. But sooner or later the phenomena will come if the proper +conditions are provided for them. + + +Spirit Phosphorescence. + +The first evidence of the presence and activity of the spirit forces +striving to produce the phenomena and materialization will probably be +the appearance of peculiar hazy phosphorescent lights playing in front +of the curtain forming the front of the cabinet. These lights will +consist of small globules or balls of phosphorescent light that will +dance about, like the familiar will-o'-the-wisp seen over swamps and in +damp, woody places. These lights will flit here and there, will +alternately appear and disappear. Sometimes they will appear as if a +multitude of fire-flies were clustered in front of the curtain. When +these fire balls appear the circle may know that it is well on the way +to perfect materializations. + + +Appearance of Materialized Substance. + +As the power increases, and the conditions become stabilized and +perfected, the manifestations will become more pronounced. It often +happens that cloudy nebulous bodies of psychic substance are formed and +float around in front of the cabinet, like clouds of steam or vapor +illumined by a dim phosphorescent light. Sometimes attempts will seem to +have been made to form these clouds into the semblance of the human +body, and often these bodies are more or less incomplete, as for +instance the arms may be missing, or else there may be dark holes where +the eyes, nose, and mouth should be. It may be stated here that the +sitters should not be frightened by these sights, nor should mental +agitation be permitted to manifest too strongly, as such conditions act +to retard further developments. Sometimes perfect hands and arms +materialize, but apparently not attached to a body. These hands may +float out over the circle, and may touch the members thereof. In rare +cases these hands take articles handed them by members of the circle, +which articles are then "dematerialized" and vanish from sight, +afterward appearing in other parts of the house. Large articles of +furniture have been known to be dematerialized in this way. + + +Materialized Spirit Forms. + +Later on, the nebulous spirit forms will take on more definite lines and +form, and will become more plainly visible, and will also assume a far +more "solid" appearance. When the phenomena reaches its highest phases, +the materialized spirit forms can be plainly seen and actually +recognized by their friends in earth life. In some cases they will +actually leave the front of the curtain and will walk down among the +sitters, shaking hands with them, touching them on the cheek, or even +embracing some loved one. In rare cases these materialized forms are +able to converse with the sitters in the circle, just as plainly as when +in earth life. + + +Scientific Proof of Materialization. + +It is not the purpose of this book to prove the existence of mediumistic +phenomena--rather it points out the means and methods whereby the +student may obtain such proof for himself or herself. But it may be +suggested here that the sceptic may find an abundance of proof of the +genuineness of materialization phenomena in the records and reports made +by eminent scientists, statesmen, and others. Particularly, the report +of Sir William Crookes, the eminent English scientist, will furnish such +proof to the inquirer who demands "scientific proof" before he will +believe anything out of the usual. Sir William Crookes has given +convincing evidence of the genuineness of spirit materialization, even +going so far to offer records of the weight of materialized spirits, and +their photographs taken by him--in some instances the photographs +showing the forms of both medium and spirit materialization. + + +How to Conduct a Materializing Seance. + +In sitting for materialization, the circle should maintain the same +general demeanor that it observes at other times. Silence or dignified +conversation may be indulged in, but joking or levity should be +forbidden. Hands should be held, and reverent singing indulged in. It +should be remembered that this phase of mediumistic phenomena is not +something apart and distinct from the lesser phases which have been +described in detail in this book. On the contrary, it is simply a matter +of degree, and the same general principles underlie all phases of +mediumistic phenomena. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeat the +instructions regarding the conduct of the circle, or the rules for the +development of the medium. Read the earlier chapters for the same, which +are equally applicable in this place as in the places in which they +originally appeared. + + +Trumpet Mediumship. + +In what is known as "trumpet mediumship," the sound of the voice of the +communicating spirit is increased in power by the use of a trumpet +shaped arrangement of paper, card-board, tin, or aluminum. There is no +particular virtue in the material used, and anyone may make a +serviceable trumpet out of heavy paper or thin card-board. The principle +of the use of the "spirit trumpet" is precisely that of the well-known +megaphone, i.e., it MAGNIFIES the sound, and increases its carrying +power. A spirit speaking in the faintest whisper through the trumpet is +enabled to have its voice heard plainly by those present in the circle, +where otherwise nothing would be heard. Often the spirit force is so +strong that it will pick up the trumpet and carry it around the circle, +tapping the various members thereof, and whispering through it into the +ear of some particular members. Weak spirits, therefore, who are unable +to make themselves heard in the ordinary way, often employ the trumpet +with effect in seances. When the trumpet is used, it should be placed on +the table, awaiting the use of the spirits. + + +Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments, Etc. + +The spirit forces also sometimes will see fit to play upon musical +instruments placed in the cabinet with the medium, the guitar, mandolin, +concertina, accordion, etc., being the instruments preferred in such +cases. Of course the sceptics will claim that the medium may play the +instruments himself or herself, and thus give ground for the claim of +fraud; consequently in the case of public seances, and many private +ones as well, the medium will insist upon having his or her hands tied, +and other precautions taken to eliminate the possibility of fraud and +deception. Such precautions are in no way a reflection upon the medium, +and are, in fact, demanded by many mediums as a matter of self-respect, +self-protection, and the cause of truth. In many cases in which the +mediums were entirely lacking in musical education, knowledge, or +training, the spirits have performed skilled selections of music upon +the instruments in the cabinet. + + +Independent Slate Writing. + +What is generally known as "independent slate writing" is a very +interesting phase of mediumship, and one of the peculiarities thereof is +that such phenomena is sometimes produced through mediums who seem to +possess little or no mediumistic powers in other directions. In +independent slate writing there is no employment of the hands of the +medium by the spirit to form the letters, words, and sentences of the +communication. On the contrary, the writing is done directly by the +spirit forces, independent of the organism of the medium. Of course the +psychic power of the medium and his vital energy as well is drawn upon +by the spirits in producing this form of manifestation, but the medium +is sometimes seated out of reach of the slates and in no case actually +touches the pencil. + + +The Slate Writing Circle. + +Independent slate writing is performed as follows: The circle selects +two common slates, or else one folding slate. A small bit of chalk, or a +tiny piece of slate pencil is placed between the two slates, the latter +being then placed tightly together, and then bound with thick, strong +twine--in some cases the ends of the twine are fastened with sealing +wax. This trying and sealing is for the purpose of eliminating the +suspicion of fraud or deceit, and for the purpose of scientifically +establishing the genuineness of the phenomena. The bound slates are then +placed on the table in the middle of the circle. In some cases the +medium rests his hands on the slate, and in other cases he keeps his +hands entirely away from them--the phenomena itself evidently being +produced with equal facility in either case. A written question may +either be placed inside the slate on a small bit of paper, or else +sealed and placed on top of the tied slates. In some cases the +scratching sound of the pencil may be heard proceeding from the tied +slates, while on others no sound is heard while the writing is being +done. When the slates are opened, at the end of the seance, the slates +will be found to contain writing--the answer to the question, or else a +general message to the circle--the writing sometimes consisting of but a +word or two, while in other cases both of the inside surfaces of the +slate will be found to be covered with writing. It often requires quite +a number of sittings before this phase of phenomena is secured; in many +cases it is never actually secured in a satisfactory form. + + +Spirit Paintings. + +There are cases of record in which crayon drawings have been produced on +the slates by enclosing small bits of various colored crayons therein +when the slates are tied together. Again, oil paintings have been +secured on the slates, after small dabs of oil paint of various colors +have been placed on the inside surface of the slates, a little linseed +oil being poured on each. + + +Fraudulent Slate Writing. + +Slate phenomena has been brought into some degree of discredit and +disrepute during the past ten years or more, by reason of the fact that +a number of unscrupulous "fakers," or bogus-mediums, employed a system +where this class of phenomena was counterfeited by trick methods. But, +as all careful investigators of mediumistic phenomena well know, some +wonderful results are still obtained, quietly and without publicity or +notoriety, in many family or private circles. In this case, and in many +others, the very best mediumistic phenomena is often produced in those +family or private circles, where mutual sympathy, harmony, and spiritual +understanding prevail, and where there is an absence of the sceptical, +cavilling, negative mental attitudes, which tend to interfere with the +free flow of spirit power and the degree of manifestation. The tiny +flame burning on the family altars and in the private shrines serve to +keep alive the Light of the Spirit, which is too often dimmed by the +public glare of counterfeit and sensational exhibitions of so-called +spirit power. + + +Practical Advice to Developing Mediums. + +The young developing medium who has read the foregoing pages of this +book will in all probability soon discover just what phase of mediumship +is best suited for his natural powers, temperament and psychic +constitution. As his innate psychic powers unfold and develop he will be +almost instinctively led in the particular directions in which these +powers may find the opportunity for the best form of expression and +manifestation. And, at the same time, the spirit friends which the young +medium will have drawn to himself will have discovered, by means of +experimentation, just what phase of mediumship the young medium would +best develop in order to convey the messages and communications from the +spirit side of life. The following bits of advice from mediumistic +writers of good standing will, however, perhaps serve to make the path +clearer for the young medium who is reaching out toward the best and +most efficient form of manifestation of the powers which he has found +are within himself. + + +Need of Special Development. + +A writer says: "As a general rule, the best results of mediumship are +secured by special development along the lines of natural aptitude. A +'Jack of all trades is master of none,' and such a one is a failure in +mediumship as in anything else. You may find it helpful to visit a +public medium who is already developed, and who can examine you and give +you insight into your natural psychic powers, and counsel you regarding +your qualifications and aptitudes, and tell you what to do. But do not +attach too much importance to directions received in that way, because +so much depends upon the knowledge and power of the operator. One spirit +might use you with success in one direction, and another in some other +phase; just as one mesmerist may make a subject clairvoyant when +another has previously attempted to do so and failed. Nothing but actual +experience will settle that point. If, however, after a reasonable +amount of patient devotion to the experiment you do not succeed, or are +disappointed with what has been done, it will be advisable to effect a +change in the conditions. A dissatisfied state of mind is a dangerous +one. You may, if you choose, sit by yourself, and try to obtain table +movements, or to get 'automatic' or passive writing. You can make +experiments in psychometry or try crystal gazing, or endeavor to +visualize and to become clairaudient, but we should not advise you to +sit alone and invite spirits to put you into the trance. It is better to +join some good private circle." + + +Advice to Discouraged Mediums. + +A writer gives the following excellent advice to young mediums who have +become somewhat discouraged at their lack of success, and slowness of +progress: "You have been already informed that you are a medium, and +that if you sit you will develop special gifts. But you may say: 'I have +sat, and have not developed as I was assured I should.' That is quite +probable. The medium whom you consulted may have misjudged your +capabilities; the spirit may have estimated what he could have done with +or through you, and, from his point of view, may have been perfectly +accurate; but possibly the spirits who have endeavored to develop you +were unable to succeed. People often say: 'I have been told many times +that I should make a good medium, but I have not had satisfactory +results.' When we hear such statements we are prompt to ask: 'Have you +sat for development for any length of time in a harmonious and congenial +circle? You cannot expect growth unless you give the requisite +conditions. You might as well anticipate a harvest without sowing the +seed--just because you bought a sack of wheat! The marvelous results +achieved by expert acrobats and athletes are due to their indomitable +determination to succeed, and their steady and continuous training of +eye, and muscle, and nerve. They concentrate their attention and focus +all their powers, and are at once temperate, patient, and persevering in +their experiments. The same spirit of devotion; the same firm attitude +and watchful attention to all the details; and the same observance of +the conditions, physical, mental, moral, and spiritual, are needed if +you would educate yourself and become a fit and serviceable instrument +for exalted spirit intelligence to afford humanity the benefit of their +experiences "over there."'" + + +Avoid Cross-Magnetism. + +A popular mediumistic writer has given the following excellent words of +warning to young mediums: "Do not go into public promiscuous 'developing +circles.' There is always a danger of 'cross magnetism' and disorderly +manifestations in such gatherings. Owing to the mixed and inharmonious +mental, moral, and physical conditions which necessarily exist where a +number of strangers and curiosity seekers are attracted, you run the +risk of being affected by undeveloped, unprincipled, frivolous, +mercenary, self-assertive, or even immoral spirits, who, being attracted +to such assemblies, seek to influence incautious and susceptible people +who ignorantly render themselves liable to their control. The people +'on the other side' are human beings of all grades; they are not morally +purified by passing through the death-change; and as we are constantly +sending into their other state 'all sorts and conditions of people,' you +need not be at all surprised if you get into intercourse with the vain +and foolish, the unreliable and pretentious, or the selfish and sinful, +if you indiscriminately open the doors of your psychic self and give a +free invitation to any spirit 'passer by.'" + + +Avoid Psychic Absorption. + +"You can waste your time, and you can sit in circles, absorb all kinds +of psychological influences, exhaust your own, and in many cases become +so filled up with contending influences that you are in a state of +psychological fever all the time, or so exhaust yourself that you will +become as limp and useless as a rag. This is not the way to use the +opportunities you have; and you should avoid the injudicious, +promiscuous, and insane methods of development of many who are extremely +anxious to develop you as a medium, and who often bring discredit upon +the subject of mediumship, and do no one the slightest practical +good--not even themselves. We admit that the motives of those who +conduct public promiscuous developing circles are good in most cases, +but their methods are frequently 'injudicious'--to put it mildly. Under +ordinary circumstances, your own pure purpose and the spirits who are in +sympathy with your exalted desires and intentions, are sufficient +safeguards against the intrusion of low, mischievous or malicious +spirits, but you should not venture into conditions which require the +trained and disciplined will, and the influence of wise and powerful +spirits to protect you against danger, until you have acquired the +ability to render yourself positive to the psychic spheres of +undesirable people, both in or out of the physical body, and can +voluntarily become passive and responsive to the true and trustworthy +friends whom you know and love." + + +The Stewardship of Great Powers. + +We can not hope to more fitly close this book devoted to the brief +presentation of the facts of the psychic world, and the world of spirit, +than by quoting the following words uttered by a faithful laborer in the +vineyard of spiritualism: "Spiritualism helps us to understand the +'unity of spirit' and 'the brotherhood of man' in the divine +relationship wherein the greatest among us is the servant of all. The +possession of great gifts is an added responsibility. We are only +stewards of our powers on behalf or others, and our desire to gain +knowledge and influence should be vitalized and dignified by the +intention to use them to help, teach, and serve our fellows, and in such +service we shall ourselves be blest." + +FINIS. + + +--------------------------------------------------------------+ + | Transcriber's Notes: | + | | + | Page 3: Interpretating amended to Interpenetrating; | + | Tranformation amended to Transformation. "Unchartered | + | Seas" _sic_ | + | Page 4: Varities amended to Varieties | + | Page 5: Full stop added after VII; Temperment amended to | + | Temperament; It amended to Is | + | Page 6: Phosphoresece amended to Phosphorescence | + | Page 7: preceived amended to perceived | + | Page 9: "Subnormal" _sic_; Byond amended to Beyond; | + | opening quote marks added to "supernormal" | + | Page 19: "subdivisions, and sub-divisions" _sic_ | + | Page 20: occulists amended to occultists; terrestial | + | amended to terrestrial. Missing closing quotes for | + | quotation addedafter 'radiant energy.' "Several great | + | class" _sic_ | + | Page 23: Kellar amended to Keller; duplicate "have" | + | removed | + | Page 24: Kellar amended to Keller | + | Page 28: interpretating amended to interpreting; pagaent | + | amended to pageant | + | Page 29: preception amended to perception | + | Page 30: duplicate word "of" removed | + | Page 34: One instance of Ochorowicz, one instance of | + | Ochoriwicz. Left as is | + | Page 37: second comma in 400,000,000,000,000 removed; | + | beyound amended to beyond; tremblngs amended to | + | tremblings; eough amended to enough | + | Page 40: wthout amended to without; phenoment amended | + | to phenomena | + | Page 41: Roetgen amended to Roentgen | + | Page 42: senes amended to senses | + | Page 45: duplicate line of text removed | + | Page 50: menium amended to medium | + | Page 51: transfrence amended to transference | + | Page 54: thought-wives amended to thought-waves | + | Page 57: coldenss amended to coldness | + | Page 61: pheonmena amended to phenomena; beenficial | + | amended to beneficial | + | Page 63: a amended to at | + | Page 66: resistence amended to resistance | + | Page 68: implicity amended to implicitly | + | Page 84: infinitessimal amended to infinitesimal | + | Page 85: antedeluvian amended to antediluvian | + | Page 92: Certain amended to Certainly; ont amended to not | + | Page 94: mainfested amended to manifested | + | Page 99: Symbollic amended to Symbolic; symbollically | + | amended to symbolically; sudent amended to student | + | Page 101: rendiiton amended to rendition | + | Page 103: self-stupefication _sic_ | + | Page 105: very amended to vary | + | Page 109: occultist amended to occultists | + | Page 120: "There is ... many degrees" _sic_ | + | Page 123: unforseen amended to unforeseen | + | Page 126: Section heading Absolute Time relocated from | + | middle of paragraph; unescapable _sic_ | + | Page 135: being amended to beings | + | Page 136: Spritualism amended to Spiritualism | + | Page 137: enlighted amended to enlightened | + | Page 138: adherance amended to adherence | + | Page 145: perseverence amended to perseverance; | + | unconciously amended to unconsciously | + | Page 155: occulists amended to occultists | + | Page 160: produtcion amended to production | + | Page 170: genearly amended to generally | + | Page 174: Missing full stop added | + | Page 174: fundmental amended to fundamental | + | Page 182: "Materializations follows" _sic_ | + | Page 185: parthway amended to pathway | + | Page 186: "modus operana" _sic_ | + | Page 187: apostrophe added to others | + | Page 190: "personal composition" _sic_ | + | Page 203: uninterupted amended to uninterrupted; | + | Psyschic amended to Psychic | + | Page 210: meduim amended to medium; coures amended to | + | course | + | Page 213: "finnicky" and "finnickiness" _sic_ | + | Page 215: senuous amended to sensuous | + | Page 219: healings amended to healing | + | Page 223: phychic amended to psychic; "subject is" | + | amended to "subject if" | + | Page 225: comma after auto replaced with hyphen | + | Page 232: showe amended to show | + | Page 235: super-senous amended to super-sensuous | + | Page 236: Condtiion amended to Condition | + | Page 243: himeslf amended to himself | + | Page 249: how amended to now | + | Page 252: "clear and," amended to "clear, and" | + | Page 256: indicte amended to indicate | + | Page 260: showly amended to slowly | + | Page 265: materilaization amended to materialization | + | Page 267: mediumsistic amended to mediumistic | + | Page 268: phemonea amended to phenomena | + | Page 269: accordian amended to accordion | + | Page 270: State amended to Slate | + | Page 276: ignoranty amended to ignorantly | + | | + | Small inconsistencies between the Table of Contents and | + | the section titles, such as spelling, capitalization and | + | hyphenation have been retained. In addition to these the | + | following discrepancies are here noted, but have been | + | retained: | + | Page 3 Part I In the Table of Contents | + | Super-sensible Vibrations should | + | be followed by The Higher Vibrations. | + | The Higher Senses of Man is The | + | Higher Senses of Men on page 21. | + | In the Table of Contents Discovery | + | of New Worlds should be followed by | + | Transcendental Senses. | + | Part III The Categories of Thought is titled | + | The Contagion of Thought on page 56. | + | Page 4 In the Table of Contents Repelling | + | Adverse Influences should be followed | + | by Neutralizing Psychic Influences. | + | Part IV Classification of Clairvoyant | + | Phenomena is Classification According | + | to General Distinctions on page 81. | + | Part V In the Table of Contents Absolute | + | Time should be followed by: The | + | Occult Hypothesis. "The Prophecy of | + | Cazotte." The Dinner of the Elect. | + | The Illuminatus. The Beginning of the | + | Prophecy. The Shadow of the | + | Guillotine. The Fall of the Great. | + | The Fate of Royalty. The Fulfillment | + | of the Prophecy. Other Historical | + | Instances. The Eternal Verities. | + | Page 5 Part VII Spirit Impersonation is titled Spirit | + | Inspiration on page 165. | + | Inspirational Speaking is titled | + | Inspirational Writing on page 168. | + | Part VIII In the Table of Contents The Jacob's | + | Ladder of Communion should be | + | followed by The Attainment of | + | Excellence. | + | Page 6 Part IX Difficulties Among Spirits is | + | Differences Among Spirits on page | + | 215. In the Table of Contents | + | Self-Protection for Mediums should be | + | followed by: Danger in Indiscriminate | + | Magnetizing. Detrimental Magnetic | + | Influence. Mediumistic | + | Auto-Suggestion. "Psychic Sponges." | + | Investigate Your Spirits. Spirits Are | + | Still Human Beings. Beware of | + | Domineering Spirits. | + | Part X Impersonating Manifestations does not | + | appear in the text. | + | Part XI In the Table of Contents Spirit | + | Paintings should be followed by: | + | Fraudulent Slate Writing. | + | Practical Advice to Developing | + | Mediums should be followed by: Need | + | of Special Development. Advice to | + | Discouraged Mediums. Avoid | + | Cross-Magnetism. Avoid Psychic | + | Absorption. The Stewardship of Great | + | Powers. | + | | + | Section titles sometimes end with a full stop, and other | + | times not: left as is. | + | | + | Quotation marks and hyphenation have generally been | + | standardised. Where a word occurs an equal number of times | + | as hyphenated and unhyphenated, both forms have been | + | retained. Where two spellings of a word have been used (for | + | example, magnetiser/magnetizer; skeptic/sceptic) both have | + | been retained. | + +--------------------------------------------------------------+ + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible +Powers, by Bhakta Vishita + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GENUINE MEDIUMSHIP *** + +***** This file should be named 25337.txt or 25337.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/3/3/25337/ + +Produced by Suzanne Lybarger, Brian Janes and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |